Sunteți pe pagina 1din 343

ViBE VS7000

Convergent Video System

User Manual
Release 03.01

Edition M
Contacting Thomson Video Networks

Contacting Thomson Video Networks


http://www.thomson-networks.com/

2 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Contents

Preface ............................................................ 11

Chapter 1
Overview ......................................................... 17
Product Overview .................................................................. 18
Purpose ....................................................................................... 18
Main Features ............................................................................. 18
System Applications .................................................................. 19
Product Description ............................................................... 20
Chassis ........................................................................................ 20
Overview ................................................................................ 20
Front Panel ............................................................................. 21
Rear Panel .............................................................................. 23

Chapter 2
Installation and Startup .................................. 27
Unpacking .............................................................................. 28
Mounting in Rack (Recommendations) ............................... 29
Ventilation................................................................................... 29
Cabling ........................................................................................ 29
Power Supply and Protective Ground ...................................... 29
Power Supply Cord(s) ........................................................... 29
Installing the Device (Steps) ................................................. 30
10RU and 6RU Devices .............................................................. 30
1RU Device.................................................................................. 30
Powering Up .......................................................................... 32
1RU Device Specifics ................................................................. 32
6RU and 10RU Device Specifics................................................ 32
Performing the Initial Settings.............................................. 33
Preparing the Connection.......................................................... 33
Accessing the Web Interface for the First Time....................... 33
Checking Node Status................................................................ 33
Performing the IP Configuration ............................................... 34
Preparing the Definitive Connection......................................... 34
Establishing the Definitive Connection .................................... 35
Setting the Date and Time......................................................... 36

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 3


User Manual - Edition M
Contents

Chapter 3
Web Graphical Interface ................................. 37
Reaching the GUI .................................................................. 38
GUI Overview........................................................................ 39
General Organization ................................................................. 39
Customizing the Display ............................................................ 40
Resizing the Columns............................................................ 40
Sorting Elements in Arrays................................................... 40
Commonly Used Elements........................................................ 40
Status Pictograms ................................................................. 40
Other Pictograms................................................................... 41
Tables ..................................................................................... 41
Basic Settings........................................................................ 42
Creating a Job ............................................................................ 42
Launching a Job from a Workflow....................................... 42
Setting the Job Parameters .................................................. 44
Creating a TS over IP Input to TS over IP Output Transcoding Job 45
Creating a Statmux Job ............................................................. 45
Creating a Job Based on a Sample Workflow ......................... 46
Sample IP TV 1....................................................................... 46
Sample Web TV HLS 1 .......................................................... 49
Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 1................................. 52
Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 2................................. 54
Adapting a Sample Workflow ................................................... 56
List of Sample Workflows to Adapt ..................................... 56
Adapting a Sample Workflow (Steps) ................................. 57
Creating a Workflow .................................................................. 58
Introduction............................................................................ 58
Creating the Workflow .......................................................... 58
Adding Items to the Workflow ............................................. 59
Setting the Parameters of the Items .................................... 59
Publishing the Inputs and/or Outputs .................................. 59
Checking the Consistency..................................................... 60
Encoding a File ........................................................................... 60
Using a Hot Folder ..................................................................... 63
Configuring the Workflow .................................................... 63
Configuring the Hot Folder ................................................... 63
Using the Hot Folder ............................................................. 64
Configuring an SDI Input ........................................................... 64
Naming the SDI Inputs .......................................................... 64
Using an SDI Input in a Workflow ........................................ 64
Workflow Example With an SDI Input ................................. 64
Configuring an SDI System With a Matrix ............................... 65
Declaring an SDI Matrix ........................................................ 65
Naming the Matrix’ Inputs .................................................... 67
Linking the SDI Inputs To the Matrix ................................... 68
Using the Matrix’ Inputs ....................................................... 68
Creating a Snapshot View ......................................................... 69
Creating a New Snapshot View............................................ 69
Creating a Snapshot View From a Workflow ...................... 71
Interface Description ............................................................ 73

4 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Contents

Setup Tab.................................................................................... 73
Setup/Identity......................................................................... 73
Setup/IP .................................................................................. 73
Setup/Network Storage......................................................... 77
Setup/Hot Folder.................................................................... 78
Setup/SNMP........................................................................... 80
Setup/Date & Time ................................................................ 80
Setup/User Accounts............................................................. 81
Setup/Download .................................................................... 82
Setup/Logs ............................................................................. 85
Hardware Tab ............................................................................. 88
Hardware/Nodes .................................................................... 88
Hardware/SDI ......................................................................... 89
Workflows Tab............................................................................ 90
Left Area ................................................................................. 91
Right Area............................................................................... 93
Jobs Tab.................................................................................... 105
Statmux Tab ............................................................................. 110
Array ..................................................................................... 110
Parameters ........................................................................... 111
Simulation Tab ......................................................................... 112
Purpose................................................................................. 112
Use ........................................................................................ 112
Console Tab .............................................................................. 124
Snapshot Tab............................................................................ 125
Logs Tab.................................................................................... 126
Purpose................................................................................. 126
Logs Array ............................................................................ 126
Filters and Sorting Options................................................. 126
Advanced.............................................................................. 127
Status Bar.................................................................................. 128
Workflow Library Content Parameters .............................. 130
Introduction .............................................................................. 130
Item Parameters Array ........................................................ 130
Input/Output ......................................................................... 132
Multi-Instance ...................................................................... 133
Common Parameters ............................................................... 133
Specific Parameters ................................................................. 136
Workflow Library: Inputs..................................................... 136
Workflow Library: Decoding ............................................... 147
Workflow Library: Preprocessing ....................................... 147
Workflow Library: Encoding ............................................... 161
Workflow Library: Outputs.................................................. 173
Workflow Library: Favorites................................................ 202
Workflow Library: Samples ................................................ 203
Tools ..................................................................................... 203
Recommended Settings...................................................... 206
Recommended H.264 Bitrates in IPTV.................................... 206
All / Complex Contents........................................................ 206
Simple / Movie Contents..................................................... 207
Recommended H.264 Bitrates in WEBTV............................... 208
All / Complex Contents........................................................ 209

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 5


User Manual - Edition M
Contents

Simple / Movie Contents..................................................... 210


Recommended H.264 Statmux Settings ................................ 211

Chapter 4
Servicing ....................................................... 213
Upgrading the Firmware .................................................... 214
Unmounting the Front Panel on a 1RU Server ................ 215
Adding a Diskless Node to Your System .......................... 216
Enabling the New Diskless Node (6RU and 10RU)................ 216
Configuring the BIOS of a Diskless Node............................... 217
For a 6RU or 10RU blade: Accessing the BIOS ................. 217
For 1RU Devices: Accessing the BIOS ............................... 220
Setting the BIOS Parameters .............................................. 221
Requesting a New License File ............................................... 227
Declaring a New License File .................................................. 228
Adding a Diskless Node to Your System (1RU)..................... 228
Adding Options ................................................................... 229
Replacing a Diskless Node for your System .................... 230
Configuring the BIOS of the New Node ................................. 230
Replacing a Node ..................................................................... 230
Upgrading OnBoard Administrator firmware .................. 231
Upgrading Flex10 firmware ............................................... 232
Replacing a Hot Swappable Part ....................................... 234
6RU/10RU.................................................................................. 234
1RU Server................................................................................ 236

Chapter 5
Troubleshooting ............................................ 239
Troubleshooting Procedures ............................................. 240
Exporting Information for Customer Support ....................... 240
Modifying a Workflow from a Text Editor.............................. 241
Exporting Logs ......................................................................... 241
Using the Console .................................................................... 241
Providing Remote Access to the ViBE VS7000 System ........ 241
Frequently Asked Questions .............................................. 242
Why cannot I instantiate my job
whereas there is space on the ViBE VS7000 system?........... 242
I do not see my workflow in the list
when I want to create a job. Why?.......................................... 242
I cannot create a workflow. Why?........................................... 242
I cannot create a job. Why? ..................................................... 242
When I want to launch a job, I get a "Job is waiting: license not
available" message. What should I do? ................................. 243
I cannot modify the system parameters. Why? ..................... 243
I modified a workflow parameter, but it was not applied to the
currently running jobs. Why?.................................................. 243

6 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Contents

My Windows network storage directory is not accessible. What


should I do? .............................................................................. 243
The SNMP agent does not work. What should I do? ............ 244

Chapter 6
Customer Service .......................................... 245
Support Center Contacts..................................................... 246
Warranty............................................................................... 247
Services ................................................................................ 248
Spare Parts ........................................................................... 248
Returning Equipment .......................................................... 248
Repackaging for Shipment ................................................. 248
Long Term Product Support ............................................... 249
Recycling the Product.......................................................... 249

Chapter 7
Tools ............................................................. 251
Equipment Setup ................................................................. 252
Overview ................................................................................... 252
Operation .................................................................................. 252
Launching Equipment Setup .............................................. 252
Connecting to a Device ....................................................... 252
Setting Device Parameters.................................................. 255
HP Monitoring Tools (6RU and 10RU Devices) ................. 256
Connecting to the HP Monitoring Tools................................. 256
Method #1: Connecting via the iLO Port in DHCP............. 256
Method #2: Connecting on the DHCP Network
using the IP Address of the Device .................................... 257
Method #3: Connecting After Manually Configuring
the IP Address of the Device............................................... 258
Performing the IP Configuration from the HP Interface........ 260
Accessing the Interconnect Bays’ Management Console 260
Configuring the Interconnect Bays..................................... 262
Saving your Configuration.................................................. 262
More Information................................................................. 263

Appendix A
Technical Specifications ............................... 265
Specifications....................................................................... 266
Electrical, Thermal and Mechanical Specifications ............... 266
VS7000 10RU........................................................................ 266
VS7000 6RU.......................................................................... 275
VS7000 1RU.......................................................................... 279
Input Specifications.................................................................. 280

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 7


User Manual - Edition M
Contents

Live Inputs............................................................................ 280


SDI Inputs............................................................................. 280
File Formats ......................................................................... 281
Decoding Specifications .......................................................... 282
Audio Decoding ................................................................... 282
Video Decoding ................................................................... 282
Processing Specifications........................................................ 283
Video Processing ................................................................. 283
Audio Processing................................................................. 283
Encoding Specifications .......................................................... 284
Audio Encoding ................................................................... 284
Video Encoding.................................................................... 287
Output Specifications............................................................... 288
Live Output........................................................................... 288
File Output............................................................................ 290
IP TV Latency ............................................................................ 292
Blade Center Physical Interface Specifications...................... 293
Control-Command Specifications........................................... 293
Standard Compliance ......................................................... 294
Ordering Guide ................................................................... 296

Appendix B
SNMP Management ...................................... 303
MIB Description .................................................................. 304
Trap Descriptions ..................................................................... 305
Register/Unregister a Manager to Receive Traps.................. 307
Get the Active Log List or Closed Log List ............................. 308
Registering SNMP Manager on the GUI ........................... 309
Enabling HP Blade Center SNMP Agent ........................... 310

Appendix C
Safety Instructions ........................................ 311

Appendix D
Regulatory Notices ....................................... 313

Appendix E
Logs .............................................................. 315
Log Categories .................................................................... 316
List of Logs .......................................................................... 317

8 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Contents

Appendix F
Network Settings (6RU and 10RU Devices) .. 321
Blades ................................................................................... 322
Internal Switches (Flex10) ....................................................... 322
Interface Bonding ..................................................................... 322
10RU Device ......................................................................... 322
6RU Device ........................................................................... 323
VLAN Tagging...................................................................... 323
Internal Switches & Software Configuration Consistency 324
Flex10 ................................................................................... 325
External Connector Description .............................................. 325
FLEX10.................................................................................. 325
FLEX10-D .............................................................................. 325
Grouping Possibilities.............................................................. 325
Flex10 Configuration................................................................ 325
How to Use a Configuration File ........................................ 326
Description of Configuration Files...................................... 326
Multicast Management ....................................................... 328
Multiple Blade Center Configuration ................................. 329
Interface Bitrates.................................................................. 331
Bitrate Allocation on 10RU Interfaces..................................... 331
Bitrate Allocation on 6RU Interfaces....................................... 331
Bitrate Allocation Rules ........................................................... 331
HP Documentation............................................................... 332

Appendix G
Network Settings (1RU Devices) ................... 333
Network Configuration........................................................ 334

Glossary ........................................................ 335

Index ............................................................. 341

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 9


User Manual - Edition M
Contents

10 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Preface

Standard Documentation Set


The ViBE VS7000 documentation set consists of:
 A User Manual
 A Quick Start Guide
 A Web Services SOAP API Getting Started document

The ViBE VS7000 User Manual contains background information about


the ViBE VS7000 Convergent Video System, and describes operating
procedures. This manual can be used while learning about ViBE VS7000,
and for enhancing your basic knowledge of the product.

The ViBE VS7000 Quick Start Guide contains information about installing
and configuring the equipment.

The ViBE VS7000 Web Services SOAP API documentation provides you
with the basic information you need to use the product’s SOAP API.

Software Version
This manual covers the functionality of the software version 03.01 of the
ViBE VS7000 product.

This manual continues to be relevant to subsequent software versions


where the functionality of the equipment has not changed. When a new
software version changes the functionality of the product, a new version
of this manual is provided.

About this Manual


This manual is written for Operators of the ViBE VS7000.

This manual should be kept in a safe place for reference for the life
time of the equipment. If passing the equipment to a third party,
please ensure to pass all relevant documentation including this
manual.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 11


User Manual - Edition M
Preface — Conventions Used in This Manual

The manual is organized into the following chapters and appendices:


 Chapter 1 ’Overview’ gives a general description of the equipment
and its main features. It also identifies the controls, indicators and
connectors on the front and rear panels.
 Chapter 2 ’Installation and Startup’ provides the procedures
required for device installation and initial configuration, and describes
how to connect the device to other devices in your system.
 Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ details how to use the Web
Browser Graphical User Interface.
 Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ describes how to add or replace nodes of your
system, and how to add options.
 Chapter 5 ’Troubleshooting’ describes the procedure to follow when
you face any problem with the equipment.
 Chapter 6 ’Customer Service’ provides you with the customer
service contacts and information on how to return a product.
 Chapter 7 ’Tools’ describes the Equipment Setup tool delivered on
the CD-ROM with the product.
 Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ gives specifications of the
device, device compliance, declarations of conformity and ordering
guide to order the device and its options.
 Appendix B ’SNMP Management’ explains how to set the SNMP
community string and the access rights. You will also find MIB
description, how to register the SNMP Manager on the VS7000
Graphical User Interface etc. It also describes the MIB used to
configure and monitor the equipment.
 Appendix C ’Safety Instructions’ gives instructions related to risk of
fire, electric shock or injury to persons. This important section is
available in English, German and French versions.
 Appendix D ’Regulatory Notices’ provides device compliances.
 Appendix E ’Logs’ gives the list of alarms visible in the Logs panel of
the GUI (XML file).

A ’Glossary’ can be found at the end of the manual just prior the ’Index’.

Conventions Used in This Manual

Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Heed Warnings
All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be
adhered to. The manufacturer cannot be held responsible for injuries or

12 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Preface — Conventions Used in This Manual

damages where warnings and cautions have been ignored or taken


lightly.

Read Instructions
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before this
product is operated.

Follow Instructions
All operating and use instructions should be followed.

Terms in this Manual


Safety-related statements appear in this manual in the following form:

Warning statements identify conditions or practices that may result


in personal injury or loss of life.

Caution statements identify conditions or practices that may result in


damage to equipment or other property, or which may cause
equipment crucial to your business environment to become
temporarily non-operational.

Notes provide supplementary information. They are highlighted for


emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately after the
relevant text.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 13


User Manual - Edition M
Preface — Documentation Feedback

Formatting
Naming conventions for the interface elements and Windows elements
in this manual follow the Microsoft Manual of Style, Third Edition.
Naming conventions for MPEG-2, ATSC, and DVB structures follow the
conventions derived from the standards documents listed in
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’. In addition, the following
formatting conventions apply to this manual:
 Pale blue text refers to specific interface elements that you are
instructed to select, click, or clear.
Example: “Select Settings from the Configuration menu”.
 Blue-Green text refers to document names, sections, figures or tables.
Example: “Refer to Section ’Warnings, Cautions and Notes’ on page
13 for more information”.
 Mono-spaced text can indicate the following:
 Text you enter from a keyboard
Example: “Enter administrator for your login and
administrator for your password”.
 Paths to components on your hard drive
Example: “The MIB is at the following location: C:\MIB”.

Documentation Feedback
We are taking great care of our publications. Please help us to improve
them by sending your feedback with the reference of the manual at the
email address:

Email: techpubs@thomson-networks.com

Important Notice
Thomson Video Networks reserves the right to make corrections,
modifications, enhancements, improvements and other changes to its
products or services at any time and to discontinue any product or
service without notice.

14 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Preface — Trademarks

Trademarks
and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
Pro Logic and Surround EX are registered trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
Supply of this Implementation of Dolby technology
does not convey a license nor imply a right under any
patent, or any other industrial or intellectual property
right of Dolby Laboratories, to use this
Implementation in any finished end-user or
ready-to-use final product. It is hereby notified that a
license for such use is required from Dolby
Laboratories.

MPEG-2 / MPEG-4 AAC audio encoding technology is


authorized by the Fraunhofer IIS license
(http://www.iis.fraunhofer.de/amm/).

All other tradenames referenced are service marks, trademarks, or registered


trademarks of their respective companies.

Copyrights
© Copyright 2013 Thomson Video Networks. All rights reserved.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 15


User Manual - Edition M
Preface — Copyrights

BLANK PAGE

16 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
1
Chapter
Overview

Introduction
This chapter gives a general description of the equipment and its main
features. It also identifies the controls, indicators and connectors on the
front and rear panels.

In this Chapter

’Product Overview’......................................................................page 18

’Product Description’...................................................................page 20

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 17


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Overview

Product Overview
The Thomson Video Networks ViBE VS7000 Video System is a
fully-integrated video solution tailored for all new convergent
applications such as Web TV and Over-The-Top (OTT) service delivery, as
well as traditional IPTV and IP/Cable delivery.

Purpose
The ViBE VS7000 provides a flexible way to design workflows. The
Workflow Builder allows the creation of live, file-based and mixed
workflows, for any kind of network.

Combining all the major audio/video codecs and the latest adaptive
streaming formats, the ViBE VS7000 provides a unique answer to IPTV
delivery, Mobile 3G/4G, Web TV streaming and OTT services
broadcasting.

Simplicity: one unique graphical user interface lets you control and
monitor hundreds of channels simultaneously. With built-in 10GigE
switches, racking and cabling nightmares vanish.

Reliability: built around highly resilient IT platforms equipped with


hot-swappable, redundant components, the ViBE VS7000 provides
native load-balancing and system redundancy to avoid downtime.

Scalability: from a single-server to multi-blade systems, the ViBE VS7000


is designed to scale and grow with your business.

Flexibility: the ViBE VS7000 allows heterogeneous architectures (SDI and


IP inputs) and simultaneous live and off line encoding.

Main Features
 Best-in-class video quality
 Support of multiple video/audio codecs
 Support of MPEG transport stream
 Adaptive Bit Rate:
 Adobe Flash
 Apple HTTP Live Streaming
 Microsoft Smooth Streaming
 MPEG-DASH
 Video resolution up to 3840 x 2160
 Progressive and interlaced modes
 Multiple output formats per channel

18 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Overview

 Scalable number of input channels


 Scalable number of output profiles
 Advanced video and audio pre-processing
 Integrated content protection
 HTTP Centralized Operation
 Workflow Builder
 SOAP/Web services for external interfacing
 Integrated load balancing and failover
 IPV4 support
 SDI/HD-SDI and router management

System Applications
Figure 1-1. System applications

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 19


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Description

Product Description

Chassis

Overview
The ViBE VS7000 product is proposed on three chassis: 1RUx19”,
6RUx19”, or 10RUx19”.

Physical characteristics are as follows:


 Hot swappable power supplies
 Hot swappable fans
 Hot swappable processing units
 Hot swappable IP switches
 Cooling: front-rear airflow

For more information on the specifications, refer to Appendix A


’Technical Specifications’ on page 265.

The sections below show the front and rear panels of the devices. For a
full description of the device, refer to the HP documentation:
 For a 1RU server, see:
G7:
h18000.www1.hp.com/products/quickspecs/13598_div/13598_div.pdf
Gen8:
h18000.www1.hp.com/products/quickspecs/14211_na/14211_na.pdf
 For a 6RU server, see:
http://h18000.www1.hp.com/products/quickspecs/12790_div/1279
0_div.html
 For a 10RU server, see:
http://h18000.www1.hp.com/products/quickspecs/12810_div/1281
0_div.html

20 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Description

Front Panel

Figure 1-2. ViBE VS7000 10RU server front panel

Figure 1-3. ViBE VS7000 6RU server front panel

Figure 1-4. ViBE VS7000 1RU server front panel

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 21


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Description

The 1RU front panel is equipped with a Slide-out System Insight Display
(SID) panel which shows the equipment status.

Figure 1-5. Slide-out System Insight Display on the ViBE VS7000 1RU server front panel

This SID features LEDs that help you to diagnose a server failure.

When an internal component fails, the indication is made on an internal


component LED (amber) and on the front panel. If the item is serviceable
without removing the server hood, as in the case of a redundant power
supply failure, the External Health LED will illuminate. If the item is
serviceable by removing the hood, as in the case of a fan failure, the
Internal Health LED will illuminate.

If no failures have occurred, the system health LEDs will be green. If a


failure has occurred, but a redundant feature has enabled the system to
continue running, the LED will be amber. If the failure is critical and is/has
caused the system to shutdown, the LED will be red. These LEDs serve
as local indicators for several failure conditions. Insight Manager will
continue to report these, and many other failure conditions, as well.

22 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Description

Rear Panel

Figure 1-6. ViBE VS7000 10RU server rear panel

Figure 1-7. ViBE VS7000 6RU server rear panel

Figure 1-8. ViBE VS7000 G7 1RU server rear panel

slot 1 slot 2

slot 0

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 23


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Description

Figure 1-9. ViBE VS7000 Gen8 1RU server rear panel

slot 1 slot 2

slot 0

Depending on your server, the content of the slots may vary:


 On a G7 server:
 Slot 0: 4 Ethernet interfaces
 Slot 1: optional additional Ethernet card
 Slot 2: optional SDI card

Figure 1-10. G7 1RU server rear panel connector

Optional additional network HD/SD SDI board (optional)*: Power supply


connectors (5 to 8) IN1 IN2 connectors

Network connectors Serial/ Optional


1 to 4 COM port redundant power
supply unit
USB connectors VGA iLO port
(not used) output
(not used)

* Other connectors are not used.

 On a Gen8 server:
 Slot 0: 4 Ethernet interfaces
 Slot 1: optional SDI card (dual, quad or octo)
 Slot 2: optional additional Ethernet card or SDI card (octo)

24 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Description

Figure 1-11. Gen8 1RU server rear panel connector

Optional board D
Optional SDI board A, B or C (network) or E (SDI)

Network connectors VGA Serial/ iLO USB Optional Power


4 to 1 output* COM port* ports* redundant power supply
port* * not used supply unit connectors
HD/SD SDI dual board*: HD/SD SDI quad board*:
IN2 IN1 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1
* Other connectors are
A B not used.

SD SDI octo board: Optional additional network SD SDI octo board:


IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 connectors (8 to 5) IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16

C D E

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 25


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 1 ’Overview’ — Product Description

BLANK PAGE

26 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
2 Chapter
Installation and Startup

Read and follow the important safety information in Section


’Safety Instructions’ on page 311, noting especially those
instructions related to risk of fire, electric shock or injury to
persons.

Introduction

This chapter provides the procedures required for device installation


and initial configuration and describes how to connect the device to
other devices in your system.

In this Chapter

’Unpacking’...................................................................................page 28

’Mounting in Rack (Recommendations)’ .................................page 29

’Installing the Device (Steps)’....................................................page 30

’Powering Up’...............................................................................page 32

’Performing the Initial Settings’ ................................................page 33

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 27


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 2 ’Installation and Startup’ — Unpacking

Unpacking
Table 2-1 lists the accessories that are always shipped with your device.
Use this list to ensure that your order is complete.

More accessories can be delivered depending on options you chose.

Table 2-1. List of accessories delivered with the device

Quantity Description

n ViBE VS7000 blade center or server: 10RU, 6RU or 1RU

n Bays (if the device is a blade center)

n Ethernet connectors (if the device is a blade center)

n Power cords

1 Cable to connect a screen, a keyboard and a mouse to a bay (if


the device is a blade center)

4 or 8 If you ordered an SDI Quad board, 4 SDI female BNC cables


If you ordered an SDI Octo board, 8 SDI female BNC cables

1 CD-ROM

28 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 2 ’Installation and Startup’ — Mounting in Rack (Recommendations)

Mounting in Rack (Recommendations)


Rack mounting is not mandatory for ViBE VS7000 but the ventilation and
safety requirements given in this section must be observed in all cases.

Ventilation
Please refer to the recommendations provided by HP.

Cabling
It is essential to separate the power supply cables from the signal cables.
When facing the rear of the rack (as the device is connected via the rear
panel), the power supply cables must be guided to the right of the chassis
and the signal cables to the left.

Power Supply and Protective Ground

Power Supply Cord(s)


 Never supply a power supply unit which is not in the chassis.
 The built-in overload protection cannot be accessed or reset.

Specifications
The AC mains power cords are only shipped with the device if ordered.

For DC supply units, use power cords suitable with the HP specifications.

Connecting AC Mains Power Supply Cord(s)


Power Supply End

The connection panel should comply with the legislation in force in the
country of installation. The connection panel must be positioned in the
rack in such a way that the plug and power cord(s) are within easy reach
for switching off purposes.

For (each) mains inlet, the wiring system must feature overload and earth
fault protection and a bipolar cut-off device or a differential circuit
breaker. If in doubt, contact a qualified electrician.

ViBE VS7000 End

Plug the power cord(s) into the mains inlet.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 29


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 2 ’Installation and Startup’ — Installing the Device (Steps)

Installing the Device (Steps)


Depending on the type of device, follow the steps below to install the
device and perform its initial configuration.

10RU and 6RU Devices


1. Install the blade center in its final position.

If you need to move the blade center, it must be empty.

2. On the front panel, install the blades in the blade center: the blades
and bays in the blade center are numbered (stickers). Insert blade #1
in bay #1, blade #2 in bay #2, etc.
3. Install the power supply units.
4. For 6RU devices: slide-out the BladeSystem Insight Display, which will
later show the equipment status.

1RU Device
1. Mount the device in a rack.
2. If the front panel is not already installed on the server, mount the
delivered front panel:
a. Engage the left side of the front panel in the notches of the
server.

Figure 2-1. Mounting the front panel – Engaging the left side

b. Grab the middle of the front panel and pull to bend it.

Figure 2-2. Mounting the front panel – Bending the middle to engage the right side

30 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 2 ’Installation and Startup’ — Installing the Device (Steps)

c. Engage the right side of the front panel in the notches of the
server.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 31


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 2 ’Installation and Startup’ — Powering Up

Powering Up

Check that ViBE VS7000 is not yet connected to a LAN. Indeed,


factory-set IP addresses may cause disturbance (address conflict) on
the LAN when ViBE VS7000 is switched on.

1. Connect the power cord(s).


2. Press the ON button.

The green POWER LED comes on.

1RU Device Specifics


When the front panel is mounted, a LED on the right side lets you check
that the platform in ON.

Also note that the front panel features a deported ON/OFF button.

Figure 2-3. Front panel – ON/OFF button and LED

LED indicating that


the platform is ON

ON/OFF button

6RU and 10RU Device Specifics


If needed, configure the power supply management (refer to the HP
Blade System Enclosure Setup and Installation Guide that corresponds to
your system, provided on the CD-ROM).

On the first start-up, use the front panel screen to check the status of the
equipment. To do so:
1. Press OK to activate the display.
2. Select Health Summary from the menu.
3. Check that all indicators are green.

32 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 2 ’Installation and Startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings

Performing the Initial Settings

Preparing the Connection


1. Connect the Private System LAN of all the platforms composing the
ViBE VS7000 to a single GigE switch:
 For blade centers: insert an SFP coupler on interface x1 of the
first internal switch of the blade center, and connect it to the
GigE switch.

Gigabit copper couplers are not fast-Ethernet compliant. Make sure


you use a device that is able to process Gigabit.

 For 1RU servers: connect the NIC 1 to the GigE switch.

The GigE switch shall be isolated from your network, as the presence
of a DHCP server could cause conflicts.

2. Connect a PC in DHCP on the GigE switch.

Accessing the Web Interface for the First Time


To access the Web interface, proceed as follows:
1. Open a Web browser.
2. Type the 192.168.250.9 IP address in the address bar and press
Enter.
3. Use the following account information:
 Login: admin
 Password: admin

If you cannot connect to the 192.168.250.9 IP address, which might


happen if the factory-set IP address has been modified, use the Discover
feature of the equipment set-up tool. See Chapter 7 ’Tools’ on page 251.

Checking Node Status


1. Select the Hardware tab.
2. Go to the Nodes category.
3. Check that:
 All nodes present in the device are displayed in the list in the
GUI.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 33


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 2 ’Installation and Startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings

 The status of each node is OK.

Performing the IP Configuration


1. Select the Setup tab.
2. Go to the IP category.
3. Set the Control (X2 on 6RU and 10RU devices) network on your
control/command network:
 If there are n nodes in the system, you need n consecutive
addresses, plus one for supervision.
 Set the following parameters:
- Address
- Mask
- Gateway (optional)
- First address: first address of the n consecutive addresses
- Supervision address
4. Set the Data 1 (X3 on 6RU and 10RU devices) network on your data
network:
 If there are n nodes in the system, you need n consecutive
addresses.
 Set the following parameters:
- Address
- Mask
- Gateway (optional)
- First address: first address of the n consecutive addresses
5. Click Apply.

Preparing the Definitive Connection


Once you have made your IP configuration from the GUI:
1. Disconnect the supervision PC from the GigE switch.

34 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 2 ’Installation and Startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings

2. Depending on the composition of your ViBE VS7000:


For a stand-alone blade server:
a. Remove the SFP coupler from interface X1.
b. Insert an SFP coupler on interfaces X2 and X3 of the two internal
switches of the blade center.

You could perform the operation on one internal switch of the


blade center only but there would be no redundancy.

c. Connect interfaces X2 on your control-command network, on


one unique switch or on two switches if they are redunded.
d. Connect interfaces X3 on your data network, on one unique
switch or on two switches if they are redunded.
If your ViBE VS7000 contains several 10RU blade centers, connect
them using specific stacking cables. Refer to Appendix F ’Multiple
Blade Center Configuration’ on page 329.
For 1RU devices:
a. Disconnect the supervision PC from interface #1.

b. Disconnect the PC from the switch.

c. Depending on the hardware configuration


1RU including two SD SDI octo boards
- Connect interface #3 to your network.
Others hardware configurations
- Connect interface #2 to your control-command network.
- Connect interface #3 to the data network.

Establishing the Definitive Connection


1. From a supervision PC connected on your control-command network,
open a Web browser.
2. Type in the address bar the supervision IP address that you configured
earlier and press Enter.
3. Use the following account information:
 Login: admin
 Password: admin

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 35


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 2 ’Installation and Startup’ — Performing the Initial Settings

Setting the Date and Time


Date settings must be performed during the installation phase.
Modifying the date (except the time zone or the daylight saving time
option) while the services are on-air may cause transitory
disturbances on those services.

To set the date and time:


1. Select the Setup tab.
2. Go to the Date & time category.
3. Choose the method that should be used to get the UTC:
 Fix it manually: enter the date and time in the UTC date and time
field.
 Get it from one or several NTP servers: add the IP address(es) of
the server(s) to the NTP synchronized list.
4. Choose the time zone to use from the drop-down list.
5. Indicate if you want to adjust the time automatically for Daylight
Saving Time.

Figure 2-4. Date and time settings

6. Click Apply.

36 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
3 Chapter
Web Graphical Interface

Introduction
This chapter explains how to use the Web Graphical User Interface to
configure the equipment.

In this Chapter

’Reaching the GUI’.......................................................................page 38

’GUI Overview’.............................................................................page 39

’Basic Settings’.............................................................................page 42

’Interface Description’.................................................................page 73

’Workflow Library Content Parameters’ ..................................page 130

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 37


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Reaching the GUI

Reaching the GUI


You can run the ViBE VS7000 GUI provided your personal computer
meets the following requirements:
 INTEL-Based PC (at least Pentium 1 GHz with 512 Mbytes of memory)
running Windows XP or Windows 7.
 Web browser must be Internet Explorer 7.0 (or higher) or Mozilla
Firefox 3.0 (or higher).
 Java Runtime Environment 2.0 or higher must be installed on client
PC. If not present, install the JavaTM 2 Standard Edition Runtime
Environment on your supervision computer. The installation software
is on the CD-ROM shipped with your ViBE VS7000 equipment.

The Graphical User Interface (GUI) is a Java applet. To launch it:


1. Open a Web browser.
2. Type the equipment IP address in the address bar and press Enter.
3. Use the following account information:
 Login: admin
 Password: admin
This is the default factory account. With administrator rights, you can
change the password at your convenience.

38 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — GUI Overview

GUI Overview
This section describes the general organization of the graphical user
interface and its main components. The display may vary depending on
the rights of the connected user.

General Organization
The graphical user interface is divided into three main areas, shown in
Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1. Graphical user interface overview

Address of the equipment

Snap-
shot
Main area
view

Logs panel

Status bar

The GUI contains the following areas:


 A Snapshot view, on the left, that shows the content of inputs in a tree.
 A main area from where you can perform configuration and
monitoring. This area contains several tabs. Click them to navigate in
the GUI.
 A Logs panel that shows the logs that are raised on the equipment.
 A status bar that provides information on the equipment status, the
date and time, etc.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 39


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — GUI Overview

Customizing the Display

Resizing the Columns


In arrays, columns can be resized. Move your mouse cursor between two
header columns. The mouse cursor should change to . Click and drag
the column to the desired size, and then release the mouse button.

Sorting Elements in Arrays


In any array, you can sort elements by any column. To do so, click the
header column once. A white arrow appears in this header.

To change the sorting mode, click the header once more. When sorted in
increasing order, the arrow is displayed. In decreasing order, the
arrow is shown.

Commonly Used Elements


Some elements are recurrent in the GUI, as pictograms for instance.
These elements are described here.

Status Pictograms
Table 3-1 lists the status pictograms used in the GUI.

Table 3-1. Status pictograms

Status icon Meaning

OK

Information message

Warning

Minor error

Major error

Critical error

40 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — GUI Overview

Other Pictograms

Table 3-2. Pictograms

Pictogram Meaning Behavior

Add Adds an item to a list.

Remove Removes a selected item from a list.

Edit Edits a parameter.

Search Indicates a search field.

Tables
The GUI contains numerous tables. In some of them, it is possible to
modify the content.

To add an item to a list, click the button.

To remove an item from a list, select a line and click the button.

To modify a value in a table, double-click the corresponding cell and type


the new value or if it is a list, select a value from the list. In some lists, it
is also possible to add values. For instance, in a TS audio video
extractor item, you can leave the PMT PID to Auto or enter your own
value.

Figure 3-2. Example of editable drop-down list

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 41


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Basic Settings

Creating a Job
To create a job, follow the procedures below.

Launching a Job from a Workflow


1. Click the Jobs tab.

Figure 3-3. Opening the Jobs tab

2. Click Create.

Figure 3-4. Creating a job

3. In the list, choose a workflow according to the target application:


 Live SD-HD Encoder: to be used for Live encoding to an SPTS or
MPTS (statmux included) output.
 Live SD-HD Transcoder: to be used for Live transcoding to an
SPTS or MPTS (statmux included) output.
 Live WebTV Transcoder: to be used for Live transcoding for
WebTV (with or without packaging).

42 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Figure 3-5. Choosing the workflow on which to base the job

4. Click Ok.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 43


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Setting the Job Parameters


The list of parameters that you must set to create the job is displayed.

Figure 3-6. Setting the job parameters

1. Fill in the Name field on the left. This name will later appear in the list
of jobs. Choose this name carefully so that you are able to recognize
it easily in the list, as there may be a high number of jobs in the list.
2. For a file encoding job, you can set a priority for the job and its speed:
 Priority: if there are not enough resources (CPU, memory...) to
process all the jobs, and if you want this particular job to be
processed before the others, set an important priority (between
1 and 250; 250 being the highest priority). The other jobs will be
processed more slowly.

44 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

 Speed: if set to 1, the job will last at most as long as the video
duration. If set to 2, the job will last at most half as long as the
video duration, etc.
Note that if the network bitrate is too low, the speed goal might
not be respected.
If not configured, the job will get the available resources of the
most available node.
Note that a live job always holds priority over file encoding jobs. If
there are not enough resources, the transcoding is kept in waiting
state until resources become available.
3. Set the parameters in the right part of the view. If you need details on
the parameters, refer to section Section ’Workflow Library Content
Parameters’ on page 130.
4. Click Create and start.

The job is displayed in the Jobs list. Check its status and its state.

For more information on the Jobs tab, see Section ’Jobs Tab’ on
page 105.

Creating a TS over IP Input to TS over IP Output


Transcoding Job
To create a job that will transcode a video coming from a TS over IP input
and send it to a TS over IP output, proceed as follows:
1. Follow the steps described earlier in Section ’Creating a Job’ on
page 42.
2. Choose the Live SD-HD Transcoder workflow delivered with your
equipment and marked as Favorite.
3. Set the parameters in each one of the categories listed in the tree on
the left (see Figure 3-6).
For Audio transcodings, note that you can add or remove
transcodings as needed, using the Add audio transcoding button at
the Audio transcoding level, or the Remove button at the sub-level.
The same rule applies to pass-through components.
4. Click Create and start.

Creating a Statmux Job


To create a job that uses statistical multiplexing, proceed as follows:
1. Create one Live SD-HD Transcoder workflow (see Section ’Creating a
TS over IP Input to TS over IP Output Transcoding Job’ on page 45)
for each program of the MPTS you wish to create.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 45


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

2. In each job, set the parameters in each category of the tree on the left,
with the following specificities:
 In the Global parameters, choose MPTS.
 in the Video category, set the Rate mode to Statmux and set the
Minimum bitrate, Maximum bitrate and Quality parameters.
 In the Output category, choose the same MPTS name for each
job.
3. Click Create and start.

On the first time you create a job in Statmux mode, 2 jobs are actually
created: one for the MPTS multiplexing process and one for the encoding
process. When creating the next jobs, only the encoding job is created
and it is linked to the MPTS multiplexing job created earlier.

Monitoring can be done from the Statmux view.

Creating a Job Based on a Sample Workflow


Sample workflows are provided with the ViBE VS7000 equipment. To use
them, proceed as described in Section ’Creating a Job’ on page 42
above.

When selecting a sample workflow from the list of workflows, you have
to set a number of parameters before launching the job. These
parameters are split into different tabs.

Browse the tabs and set the parameters shown in the figures.

Once you are done, click Create.

Sample IP TV 1
The Sample IP TV 1 workflow generates an IP TV MPEG-2 transport
stream.

The source is a program issuing from a TS over IP stream.

The video is transcoded into H.264. Audio components can be


transcoded or sent in pass-through mode. Other components are sent in
pass-through mode.

The output stream is TS over UDP/IP or TS over RTP/UDP/IP.

The figures below show the different tabs and parameters to set in the
Sample IP TV 1 workflow.

46 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Figure 3-7. Sample IP TV 1 workflow – Input TS tab

If you need details on the parameters, refer to Section ’Workflow


Library: Inputs’ on page 136.

Figure 3-8. Sample IP TV 1 workflow – Video, Processing, Encoding tab

If you need details on the parameters, look for the video subsections in
Section ’Workflow Library: Preprocessing’ on page 147 and Section
’Workflow Library: Encoding’ on page 161.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 47


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Figure 3-9. Sample IP TV 1 workflow – Audio tab

If you need details on the parameters, look for the audio subsections in
Section ’Workflow Library: Preprocessing’ on page 147 and Section
’Workflow Library: Encoding’ on page 161.

Figure 3-10. Sample IP TV 1 workflow – Output TS tab

If you need details on the parameters, refer to Section ’Workflow


Library: Outputs’ on page 173.

48 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Figure 3-11. Sample IP TV 1 workflow – Pass-through component tab

Sample Web TV HLS 1


The Sample Web TV HLS 1 workflow generates an HLS output.

The input is a TS file or a TS over IP input. A program is transcoded


(audio and video), the chunks are generated and may be encrypted, and
are then available on the local Web server.

The figures below show the different tabs and parameters to set in the
Sample Web TV HLS 1 workflow.

Input, Audio, Video, DRM and Output Parameters

Figure 3-12. Sample Web TV HLS 1 workflow – Input TS tab

If you need details on the parameters, refer to Section ’Workflow


Library: Inputs’ on page 136.

Figure 3-13. Sample Web TV HLS 1 workflow – Video tab

If you need details on the parameters, refer to Section ’Workflow


Library: Decoding’ on page 147 and Section ’Workflow Library:
Preprocessing’ on page 147.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 49


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Figure 3-14. Sample Web TV HLS 1 workflow – Output HLS tab

If you need details on the parameters, refer to Section ’Output/HLS


Output’ on page 181.

Figure 3-15. Sample Web TV HLS 1 workflow – DRM tab

If you need details on the parameters, refer to Section ’Output/HLS


Output’ on page 181.

Figure 3-16. Sample Web TV HLS 1 workflow – Audio component tab

If you need details on the parameters, refer to Section ’Workflow


Library: Preprocessing’ on page 147.

50 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Resolutions and Encoding Profiles


This workflow lets you configure the video resolutions (size and frame
rate). You may define from 1 up to 5 video resolutions. For each video
resolution, you can then define one or several encoding profiles. You can
also define 0 or 1 audio component.

Figure 3-17. Sample Web TV HLS 1 workflow – Resolutions

Proceed as follows:
1. Define the number of video resolutions you want to use.
2. For each resolution:
a. Set the frame rate, in frames per second.

b. Select a size from the list (if custom, enter the values in pixels).

c. Open the appropriate Profiles tab and set the encoding profiles
parameters.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 51


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Figure 3-18. Sample Web TV HLS 1 workflow – Encoding profiles on resolutions

To add an encoding profile on a resolution, click the Add Profiles on


resolution button on the right side of the panel.

Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 1


The Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 1 workflow generates a
Smooth Streaming output.

The input is a TS file or a TS over IP input. A program is transcoded


(audio and video), the chunks are generated and may be encrypted, and
are then available on the local Web server.

Two URLs can be used to retrieve the program:


 http://<IP address>/<Folder>: choose this URL to first download
the embedded player, which will display the program.
 http://<IP address>/<Folder>/manifest.ismc: choose this URL
if you do not want to use the embedded player.

The figures below show the different tabs and parameters to set in the
Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 1 workflow.

52 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Input, Audio, Video, DRM and Output Parameters

Figure 3-19. Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 1 workflow – Input TS tab

If you need details on the parameters, refer to Section ’Workflow


Library: Inputs’ on page 136.

Figure 3-20. Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 1 workflow – Video tab

Figure 3-21. Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 1 workflow – Output Smooth Streaming
tab

If you need details on the parameters, refer to Section ’Output/Smooth


Streaming’ on page 190.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 53


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Figure 3-22. Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 1 workflow – DRM tab

If you need details on the parameters, refer to Section ’Output/Smooth


Streaming’ on page 190.

Figure 3-23. Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 1 workflow – Audio component tab

If you need details on the parameters, refer to Section ’Workflow


Library: Preprocessing’ on page 147.

Resolutions and Encoding Profiles


This workflow lets you configure the video resolutions (size and frame
rate). You may define from 1 up to 8 video resolutions. For each video
resolution, you can then define one or several encoding profiles. You can
also define 0, 1 or more audio components.

The operating mode and the parameters are exactly the same as on an
HLS output: refer to Section ’Resolutions and Encoding Profiles’ on
page 51.

Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 2


The Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 2 workflow generates a
Smooth Streaming output.

The input is a TS file or a TS over IP input. A program is transcoded


(audio and video), the chunks are generated and are then posted to a
remote IIS server.

The figures below show the different tabs and parameters to set in the
Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 2 workflow.

54 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Input, Audio, Video and Output Parameters

Figure 3-24. Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 2 workflow – Input TS tab

If you need details on the parameters, refer to Section ’Workflow


Library: Inputs’ on page 136.

Figure 3-25. Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 2 workflow – Video tab

Figure 3-26. Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 2 workflow – Output Smooth Streaming
tab

If you need details on the parameters, refer to Section ’Output/Smooth


Streaming’ on page 190.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 55


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Figure 3-27. Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 2 workflow – Audio component tab

If you need details on the parameters, refer to Section ’Workflow


Library: Preprocessing’ on page 147.

Resolutions and Encoding Profiles


This workflow lets you configure the video resolutions (size and frame
rate). You may define from 1 up to 8 video resolutions. For each video
resolution, you can then define one or several encoding profiles. You can
also define 0, 1 or more audio components.

The operating mode and the parameters are exactly the same as on an
HLS output: refer to Section ’Resolutions and Encoding Profiles’ on
page 51.

Adapting a Sample Workflow


In the workflows library in the Workflows tab, you can find some sample
workflows with a red category ( ). Those that do not have a lock sign
are meant to be adapted to your needs.

List of Sample Workflows to Adapt


The following sample workflows are provided:
 Sample IP TV - SDI input:
 SDI input
 No preprocessing
 Audio and video encoding
 TS over IP output

56 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

 Sample IP TV - HD to SD:
 SDI input in HD
 Resize into SD
 Audio and video encoding
 TS over IP output
 Sample IP TV - TSoIP input (transcoding workflow):
 TS over IP input
 No preprocessing
 Audio and video encoding
 TS over IP output
 Sample Mosaic - 6 HD inputs:
 6 TS over IP inputs in HD
 Mosaic generation
 TS over IP output
 Sample Web TV - HLS WebDAV:
 TS over IP input
 Generation of 3 adaptive bitrate profiles with audio encoding
 HLS output sent to a remote Web server in WebDAV
 Sample Web TV - Smooth Streaming to IIS server:
 TS over IP input
 Generation of 3 adaptive bitrate profiles with audio encoding
 Smooth Streaming output sent to an IIS server in http post
 Sample file-to-file transcoding:
 TS file input
 Video transcoding in 720p59.94 resolution
 Audio and data in pass-through
 TS file output with PIDs identical to the ones in input
 TS output filename identical to TS input filename
 Workflow usable directly or via a hot folder

Adapting a Sample Workflow (Steps)


To adapt a sample workflow, proceed as follows:
1. Identify the sample workflow in which you are interested.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 57


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

2. Double-click it to display it in the right area.


3. Click Duplicate so as to keep the original sample workflow and to work
on a copy.
4. Click Properties and enter an explicit name for your workflow.
5. Open the items and modify the values at your convenience.
6. Save the workflow.

You can now create jobs based on this workflow.

Creating a Workflow
If the Favorite workflows do not fully match your requirements, you may
build your own workflows. This expert mode lets you expand your
VS7000 capabilities considerably.

Introduction
A workflow is not necessarily instantiable. It is instantiable if it forms a
full chain from input to output. Otherwise, it can be considered as a
sub-workflow. With several sub-workflows, you can make a full
instantiable workflow.

For instance, you could have one workflow with input items and one
workflow with output items, and include these two workflows in another
workflow to form a full chain, as shown in Figure 3-28.

Figure 3-28. Creating a workflow using other workflows

Instantiable workflow

Input workflow Output workflow

The benefit of creating sub-workflows is that you can save a series of


modules, and then use them without having to define all the parameters
all over again.

The process to create any workflow is the same. The only difference is
that for sub-workflows, it is necessary to publish the inputs and/or
outputs. Follow the steps below.

Creating the Workflow


1. Click the Workflows tab.

58 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

2. Click New.
3. Enter a name for your workflow.
4. Assign a category.
5. Enter a summary and a description to provide information on your
workflow. This will be useful later to find it more easily.

Note that your workflow does not yet appear in the list in the left area.
6. Click OK.

Adding Items to the Workflow


Once the workflow is created, you need to fill it with items.
1. To add the first item, click an item from the list in the left area, and drag
it to the right area.
2. Right-click one of the item’s interface buttons and choose Link to new
from the menu.
3. Choose an item from the proposed list. The option you are pointing
with the mouse pointer is highlighted in the list and its description is
displayed.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each item to add.

Do not forget to hit the Save button once in a while.

Setting the Parameters of the Items


To access the parameters of an item:
1. Double-click the item. This displays a Properties dialog box that lists
parameters in an array.
2. Choose the parameters that you want to publish, i.e. the parameters
that the person who will create a job based on your workflow will need
to define. By default all parameters are set to private. Set the
parameters that should be editable to public.
3. From the default value column, click the cells to add your values if
needed.
4. Click OK to validate.

Publishing the Inputs and/or Outputs


Perform the following steps only if you are creating a sub-workflow,
i.e. a workflow that does not include all items from input to output.
1. If the first item of your workflow is not an input, in the Input category,
check the Publish box.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 59


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

2. If the last item of your workflow is not an output, in the Output


category, check the Publish box.

Figure 3-29 shows an example of a workflow that includes an input, a


decoding item and a preprocessing item. In this case, it is necessary to
publish the output of the preprocessing item.

Figure 3-29. Workflow publication example

Checking the Consistency


To know if your workflow is consistently built, click Check.

A report is displayed and indicates the problems, if any.

If there are errors:


1. Click the link of each error to open the item where the problem is
located.
2. Save your configuration.
3. Click Check again.

Encoding a File
This section provides you with an example of workflow using a TS file in
input and in output.

Figure 3-30 shows what the workflow example looks like.

60 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Figure 3-30. TS file workflow example

This workflow contains:


 1 TS file input
 For the video component:
 1 TS audio/video extractor
 1 Video decoder
 1 H.264 AVC encoder
 1 TS audio/video packetizer
 For the audio component:
 1 TS component extractor
 1 TS multiplexer
 1 TS file output

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 61


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Prerequisite: before creating the workflow, make sure you have created
the network storage(s) that will be used to read the input files and write
the output files in the Setup tab, Network Storage category.

To create this workflow:


1. Proceed as described in section Section ’Creating a Workflow’ on
page 58 and add all the items listed above.
2. Perform the settings described in the table below.

Table 3-3. Settings to perform to encode a file

Item Parameter Action

TS file input TS file network Set the default value and set to public
storage

TS file folder Set the default value and set to public

TS file name Set to public, label = "Input TS


filename"

TS Maximum format Set to HD 1080i50


audio/video
extractor Program number Label = "Input PN"

PMT PID Label = "Input PMT PID"

Component PID Label = "Input video PID"

Codec Set to Any

H.264 AVC Bitrate Set to public, label = "Output video


encoder bitrate"

Profile Set to High

Frame structure Set to Interlace, public

TS component Component PID Label = "Input audio PID"


extractor

TS multiplexer TS bitrate Set to 2,500,000 bps, public, label =


"Output TS bitrate"

TS multiplexer Component PID Make a link to "Input video PID"a


(input 1)
PMT PID Make a link to "Input PMT PID"a

TS multiplexer Component PID Make a link to "Input audio PID"a


(input 2)

TS file output TS file network Set the value


storage

TS file folder Set the value

TS file name Make a link to "Input TS filename"a


a
To know how to make links between parameters, refer to Section ’Link
Tool’ on page 134.

62 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

3. Apply the configuration.


4. Launch a job based on your workflow.

Using a Hot Folder

Configuring the Workflow


Create the workflow that you wish to apply on the files that will be placed
on the hot folder. For instance, use the workflow procedure given in
Section ’Encoding a File’ on page 60.

Configuring the Hot Folder


1. Go to the Setup tab and choose the Hot folder category.
2. Edit the configuration.
3. Click the button and add a hot folder.
4. Choose from the list the workflow you wish to apply on the files that
will be placed in the hot folder.
5. Set the public parameters of the workflow.
6. Apply the configuration.

Figure 3-31. Configuring the hot folder

1. Add 4. Apply

2. Set the
hot folder
parameters

3. Set the workflow parameters

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 63


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Using the Hot Folder


Place a file in the input folder.

A job is automatically created to process the file and an output file is


placed in the output folder.

Configuring an SDI Input


If your system is equipped with SDI inputs, this section explains how to
configure and use them.

Naming the SDI Inputs


Before using the SDI inputs, it is recommended to name them so that
they have explicit names that you can easily recognize when configuring
workflows. To do so:
1. Go to the Hardware tab and choose the SDI category.
The tab displays the nodes that contain SDI inputs.
2. Edit the configuration.
3. Double-click the node(s) you wish to use and enter names for the
inputs in the fields.
4. Apply the configuration.

Using an SDI Input in a Workflow


To use an SDI input in a workflow, proceed as follows:
1. Create a new workflow.
2. Add an SDI Input item.
3. In the SDI input list, choose the SDI input you wish to use among the
inputs you named during the previous step.
4. Set the usual SDI parameters.
5. Build the rest of the workflow at your convenience, or use the example
provided in the next section.

Workflow Example With an SDI Input


Here is an example of workflow that uses an SDI input.

64 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Figure 3-32. Workflow example with an SDI input

This workflow contains:


 1 SDI input
 For the video component:
 1 H.264 AVC encoder
 1 TS audio/video packetizer
 For the audio component:
 1 AAC HE v2 encoder
 1 TS audio/video packetizer
 1 TS multiplexer
 1 TS over IP streamer

Configuring an SDI System With a Matrix


If you have an SDI matrix in your system to manage redundancy, you
need to declare and configure it in the ViBE VS7000 equipment.

Declaring an SDI Matrix


To declare an SDI matrix, proceed as follows:
1. Go to the Hardware tab.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 65


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

2. Choose the SDI category.


3. In the top-right corner of the view, click Edit.
4. In the top-right corner of the view, click Add matrix.

Figure 3-33. Adding a new SDI matrix

5. Set the SDI matrix’ parameters:


 Number of inputs/outputs: size of the matrix.
 Name: enter a name for the matrix, at your convenience.
 IP address to connect to the SDI matrix remote equipment.
6. Click OK.

Once you have declared a matrix, the GUI displays a representation of


the matrix.

66 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Figure 3-34. New SDI matrix representation

Naming the Matrix’ Inputs


To ease your configuration, it is advised to name the matrix’ inputs.

To do so, double-click the purple matrix bar to access its parameters.


Then enter a name for each input in the Input list area.

Figure 3-35. Naming the SDI matrix inputs

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 67


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Linking the SDI Inputs To the Matrix


You can then create links between the matrix outputs and ViBE VS7000
inputs. To do this, click an output node of the matrix, hold the mouse and
drag it over an input node of an SDI card. A link is created.

Figure 3-36. Linking the SDI inputs to the matrix

Tip: you can click a link to highlight it. This might be handy to identify a
connection among numerous links.

For more information on the SDI category, see Section ’Hardware/SDI’


on page 89.

Using the Matrix’ Inputs


When creating a workflow, in the SDI input item, you can enter the name
of the SDI matrix input in the SDI input parameter.

The list of the matrix’ inputs is automatically proposed in the SDI input
parameter. You can thus select the matrix input that you wish to use.

Otherwise, proceed the same way as for a simple SDI input, as described
in Section ’Configuring an SDI Input’ on page 64.

When you launch a job, the matrix is automatically configured and


crosspoints are created.

Tips:
 When placing the cursor over an internal crosspoint of the matrix, a
tooltip is displayed to help you identify matrix’ connections.
 You can copy the internal crosspoints of the matrix to the clipboard
and paste them into a text or Excel document.

68 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Figure 3-37. SDI matrix with an internal crosspoint created

Creating a Snapshot View


There are two ways of creating a snapshot view:
 By clicking New in the Snapshot view.
 By specifying it when creating a job with a TS over IP or file input.

Creating a New Snapshot View


If you want to see what your input contains so as to ease your
configuration, you can display the content of your input transport stream
in a tree in a snapshot view. To do so:
1. In the Snapshot view top-right corner, click New.
2. Choose the type of input: TS over IP or TS file.
3. Depending on the type of input, set the following parameters:
For a TS over IP input:

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 69


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Figure 3-38. Creating a new snapshot view for a TS over IP input

a. If your input is multicast, check the corresponding box and set


the LAN.

b. Enter the destination IP address and UDP port of the TS over IP


stream.
c. If you want to choose the source of the stream, check the Select
source IP address box and fill in the field. You can specify only
one source IP address. If you do this, the operating mode varies
according to the type of IP stream (multicast or unicast) and the
IGMP version indicated in the VS7000 setup parameters (Setup
tab, IP category):
- Multicast, IGMP v2: IGMP requests cannot contain the
source IP address because IGMP v2 does not allow it.
Therefore, IGMP requests only ask the multicast address.
When a datagram is received, it is discarded if it does not
come from the specified source IP address.
- Multicast, IGMP v3: IGMP v3 request use the SSM mode
and can specify the source IP address.
- Unicast: when a datagram is received, it is discarded if it
does not come from the specified source IP address.

d. Indicate a maximum TS bitrate, in bits per second.

70 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

For a TS file input:

Figure 3-39. Creating a new snapshot view for a TS file input

a. Enter the network storage where the TS file to use as a source is


stored.

b. Enter the name of the folder on the network storage where the
TS file to use as a source is stored.

c. Enter the name of the TS file to use as a source.


4. Select the standard of the input stream: MPEG-2, DVB or ATSC.

The snapshot view is automatically created and updated.

To delete the snapshot view, you can either click the cross button in the
Snapshot panel, or remove the job corresponding to the snapshot view
in the Jobs tab.

Figure 3-40. Deleting a snapshot view

Creating a Snapshot View From a Workflow


When creating a workflow that contains a TS over IP input or a TS file
input, you can specify directly in the input configuration that you want to
create a snapshot view.

To do so, set the Monitoring view parameter to true, and specify the
Standard parameter by choosing the table on which the tree should be
based.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 71


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Basic Settings

Figure 3-41. Creating a snapshot view from a workflow (TS over IP input)

A snapshot view is automatically created when a job based on this


workflow is launched. Click the Play button to start displaying and
updating the view. It is dynamically updated as long as the job is running.
It is deleted when the job is deleted.

72 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Interface Description
This section provides full details of the ViBE VS7000 modules, including
the interface menus and icons.

Setup Tab
The Setup tab lets you define all the parameters related to the whole
ViBE VS7000 system. The Setup tab includes several categories, detailed
in the coming sections.

Figure 3-42. Setup tab – Identity category

Setup/Identity
The Identity category lets you assign a name to your ViBE VS7000
system and describe it.

Parameters:
 System name: enter your chosen name for the ViBE VS7000 system.
 Description: provide a brief description of your ViBE VS7000 system.

Specifying these parameters enables you to identify your ViBE VS7000


system in a list of equipment more easily, for example if your ViBE
VS7000 system is integrated into a management system.

Setup/IP
The IP category lets you configure all the parameters related to the IP
network.

It is divided into five main areas.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 73


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

LANs

Figure 3-43. LAN configuration

For each LAN the table displays the following items:


 Number: number of the LAN, used to identify the LAN in logs.
 Name
 Network Address
 Mask
 Default gateway

When selecting a LAN, additional parameters are displayed on the right:


 Interface: interface (NIC) of the node that is connected to this LAN. For
more information on blade interfaces, refer to Appendix F ’Network
Settings (6RU and 10RU Devices)’ on page 321.
 Data access: there are two types of network:
 Internal: reserved for communicating audio/video data between
blade center nodes.
 External: used for audio/video data exchanged with the outside
environment (both input and output) or for control-command
purposes.
 Supervision address: this is a virtual IP address allocated to the master
node, allowing supervision of the VS7000 on this LAN. It allows you
to connect to the VS7000 without knowing which node is currently the
master node. You are recommended to set it on the control-command
network.
 First address: address of the first node. Node #1 will have this 1st
address, Node #2 will have this address plus 1, etc.
 VLAN tagging: VLAN tagging is IEEE 802.1Q standard compliant and
allows several Virtual LANs to be grouped on a single Ethernet
network.

74 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

 Maximum input bitrate and Maximum output bitrate: these bitrates


may be automatically computed. They indicate the maximum quantity
of data that the system is allowed to exchange on the network. These
values are used by the load-balancer to check that there is enough
network bandwidth to instantiate a job on a node.

If you are using VLAN tagging to share an Ethernet network between


several VLANs, you must define the available bandwidth allocation
between the VLANs: this is done via the above two parameters.

 All nodes: this mode lets you quickly configure the network on all the
nodes.
 Ranges: use this mode if you want to apply a different configuration
on the nodes, for instance to authorize access to a network from
certain nodes only or use non contiguous addresses.

Routes

Figure 3-44. Route configuration

The table shows a list of routes and displays the following for each one:
 IP address
 IP mask
 Gateway
 Metric: lets you define a preferred path if there are several routes to
reach the same destination. By default, the IP stack always chooses the
least costly route.

DNS
DNS servers are used by Web TV outputs (HLS, RTMP, Smooth
Streaming and MPEG-DASH). If the connection is lost, the VS7000
performs a DNS request and the connection is quickly restored.

Figure 3-45. DNS configuration

You can specify up to 3 DNS servers.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 75


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

For each server, check the box and enter its IP address in the field.

If you want to specify a DNS suffix, check the corresponding box and
enter a suffix value in the field.

System Private LAN

Figure 3-46. System private LAN configuration

This area contains parameters related to the private LAN of the system:
 Interface: always interface #1.
 Number: number of the LAN, used to identify the LAN in logs.
 Address
 Mask
 Address range: range of addresses that the ViBE VS7000 can use. This
range should include at least (more if possible) one address per node
plus 2 addresses. Note that at least one of these addresses will be
available through the included DHCP server, for any additional node
or for a supervision PC. The first address is reserved for internal use,
the second is for node #1, the third for node #2, etc.
 Supervision address: this is a virtual IP address allocated to the master
node, allowing supervision of the ViBE VS7000 on this LAN. It allows
you to connect to the ViBE VS7000 without knowing which node is
currently the master node.

IGMP

Figure 3-47. IGMP version configuration

This area lets you choose the IGMP version to use when performing
IGMP requests to receive multicast streams: version 2 or 3.

This parameter should be coherent within your network (the same IGMP
version should be used in your other system devices).

IGMP v3 allows you to receive a multicast stream from a specific source


IP address (SSM mode).

76 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

IP Interface

Figure 3-48. IP interface configuration

This area lets you choose when you want to raise an alarm when a link is
down.

For each IP interface, you can choose to raise an alarm:


 As soon as one link is down
 Only when the interface is down (i.e. when both links are down)
 Never

Setup/Network Storage
The Network Storage category lets you define specific storage locations
on the system for subsequent direct access.

Figure 3-49. Network storage configuration

The table contains the list of network storage locations with associated
details:
 Name: name that you will be able to use to refer to this mounting
point. Note that this is a name, not a path: do not use the "/" or "\"
symbol.
 Type: Network File System (NFS) or Common Internet File System
(CIFS).
 IP address: IP address of the file server.
 Directory: target directory on the file server. There are no conventions
to observe in this field, simply follow those that match the type of
network storage you defined. For instance, there is no need to enter a
"/" or "\" symbol on Windows, but on a Linux operating system you
must enter the full path to the network storage from the root.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 77


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

 Login: if authentication is required to access the network storage,


enter the login.
 Password: if authentication is required to access the network storage,
enter the password.
 Workgroup: if needed, specify the workgroup on which the network
storage is located.

On MS Windows, you must first share the directory before being


able to mount it.

Setup/Hot Folder
A hot folder is a directory that, when you place a file in it, automatically
detects the file and creates a job to apply the processing you specified.

The Hot folder category lets you set the parameters for hot folders. This
is where you can create hot folders and define the processing to be
applied to the files placed in them.

You must create one hot folder for each processing type.

Figure 3-50. Hot folder configuration

The table shows the list of hot folders. Click one of them to access its
parameters:

78 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

 File network storage (mounting point): indicate in which network


storage the hot folder should be created.
 File folder: enter the name of the folder on the network storage where
the hot folder should be created.
 File name filter: if you want to process only some of the files placed in
the hot folder, enter filter rules. For instance, if you want to process
any file with a trp extension, enter: *.trp.
 Delete source file after treatment: check the box to delete the source
file once the workflow has been applied to it.
 Workflow: select the workflow to be applied to the files in the hot
folder from the list.
In the frame below the list of workflows, you can see the public
parameters of the workflow. You can change the values as required.
For workflows that use a file input, the network storage, file folder and
file name parameters are automatically linked to the parameters set
above for the hot folder. If you want to use different parameters, select
the workflow parameter from the list and click the button to
remove the link.
You can also specify the following parameters for the job:
 Name: name of the job. The name of the file that triggered the
job is also appended to the name of the job.
 Priority (available for file workflows only): if there are not
enough resources (CPU, memory, etc.) to process all the jobs
and you want this particular job to be processed before the
others, set an important priority (between 1 and 250; 250 being
the highest priority). The other jobs will be processed more
slowly.
 Speed (available for file workflows only): if set to 1, the job will
last at most as long as the video duration. If set to 2, the job will
last at most half as long as the video duration, etc.
Note that if the network bitrate is too low, the speed target might
not be met.
If not configured, the job will be allocated the available
resources of the most available node.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 79


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Setup/SNMP

Figure 3-51. SNMP configuration

The SNMP category lets you perform the SNMP configuration.


 Read community: enter the name of the community.
 Read/Write community: enter the name of the community.

The table gives you the list of trap destination IP addresses with their
associated SNMP version.

For more information on SNMP, refer to Appendix B ’SNMP


Management’ on page 303.

Setup/Date & Time

Figure 3-52. Date and time configuration

You can choose to:


 Use the UTC date and time: enter the current date and time of your
location.

80 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

 Synchronize your ViBE VS7000 system with an NTP server: choose


NTP synchronize and enter the IP address(es) of one or more NTP
servers.

When a gap of more than 10 minutes is detected between the ViBE


VS7000 time and NTP server time, the ViBE VS7000 immediately
updates the time. If the gap is under 10 minutes, it slightly modifies
the frequency of its internal clock to gradually reach the NTP server
time (correction under 0.5 ms per second).

You can also:


 Select the Time zone to use from the drop-down list.
 Enable the Automatic adjustment for the daylight saving time option.

Setup/User Accounts
The User accounts category is available provided you have
administrator rights.

Figure 3-53. User accounts configuration

In this panel, you can define and manage user accounts and groups of
users, via two tables.
 The table on the left lists the user accounts with their associated
group.
You can modify the values by double-clicking them in the table.
A password protects each user account. To change it, click the Change
password button.
You can add or remove accounts using the buttons.
The admin administrator account cannot be removed.
 The table on the right lists the groups of users.
For each group, you can define the types of actions that users of this
group will be able to perform:
 System: you can grant rights for configuration and supervision,
for supervision only, or no rights at all.
 Workflow configuration: you can let the group’s users edit the
configuration of the workflows or not.
 Job configuration: you can grant rights for:
- Jobs configuration

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 81


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

- Modification of the jobs you created (User), of the jobs


created by another member of your group (Group), of any
job (All) or of no job (No).
 Job supervision: you can grant rights for the supervision of the
jobs you created (User), of the jobs created by another member
of your group (Group), of any job (All) or of no job (No).
 Simulation: you can let the group’s users launch simulation
mode or not.

Setup/Download
The Download category lets you manage software versions, licenses,
and Recovery Points.

Figure 3-54. Download panel

Software Versions
The table on the left contains the list of software versions installed on the
ViBE VS7000 system.

The Current version line shows you which version the ViBE VS7000
system is downloaded but and active.

The Next version line shows you which version the ViBE VS7000 system
is downloaded and not active.

Before downloading or activating a software version, be sure to read


section 6.1 Compatibilities of the Release Notes document.

82 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

To download a new version, click Download. Browse to locate the file


of the version and click Open. The downloaded version is now the Next
version.

Downloading a version does not affect the running version, it is not


automatically activated.

To activate the Next version, click Activate. For more information on


upgrade consequences, see Section ’Upgrading the Firmware’ on
page 214.

Licenses
The table on the right lists the software licenses installed on your ViBE
VS7000 system and shows information about these licenses.

You can see the number of software licenses you are currently using
(Quantity used), and the number of licenses that you own (Quantity
max). That lets you check if you can perform other processings or if you
have reached the maximum capacity.

You can download a new license. Click the link, browse to locate the file
of the license and click Open.

The new license is enabled as soon as the download completes.

Recovery Points
A recovery point is a file which contains all the components required to
the recover the status of the system at a specific time:
 Software version (including OS)
 License file
 Setup configuration
 List of workflows
 List of jobs
 Logs
 Database

Periodic recovery points are automatically performed and purged.

You can store up to ten manual recovery points. They will not be
removed automatically.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 83


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Figure 3-55. Recovery Points tab

The Recovery Points table lists the recovery points on your ViBE VS7000
system and their main characteristics.

The table contains the following items:


 Recovery Points: name of the recovery point file. This name is
automatically set when creating the recovery point.
 Type:
 Factory: the recovery point has been generated in the factory
and can not be erased.
 Periodic: the recovery point has been generated automatically.
A recovery point is generated daily at 12:00 (UTC). These
recovery points are automatically erased. The only ones kept are
those from:
- The 1st Sunday of the last 3 months
- The last 3 Sundays
- The last 3 days
 Manual: the recovery point has been generated manually. The
maximum number allowed is 10. They are not purged
automatically.
 Date: recovery point date creation.
 Version: software version associated with the recovery point.
 Node x: status of the recovery point storage on the node(s) with a disk:
 available: storage is complete
 in progress: storage is in progress. The recovery point is also
stored on slave nodes with disk.

84 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Recovery point management

Figure 3-56. Recovery Point management

 To add a Manual recovery point click New. Up to 10 Manual recovery


points can be stored in the device.
 To delete a recovery point select it and click Delete.
 To restore a recovery point select it, click Restore and confirm.

 Recovery point creation or restoring can take up to 10 minutes.


 The creation of a recovery point (manual or periodic) has no
effect on the operation of the system: the jobs are not disturbed.
 Restoring a recovery point interrupts the processing of jobs, and
involves a reboot of the system.

Setup/Logs
The Logs category lets you define settings related to the logs generated
by ViBE VS7000.

It is divided into three parts.

Figure 3-57. Logs configuration

Export
 Automatically export: click to automate the export of the logs and
define the frequency.
 Frequency: define how often the logs should be exported (in days,
weeks or months).

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 85


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

 Export logs older than: define the age that the logs should have to be
exported (in days, weeks or months). The date taken into account is
the date of log closure.
 Network storage: choose from the list the network storage where the
exported logs should be saved. To define network storage places, go
to the Network Storage category. For more information, refer to
Section ’Setup/Network Storage’ on page 77.
 Path: enter the path to where the exported logs should be saved on the
network storage defined earlier. To set sub-directories, use the /
separator. If the directories you enter do not already exist, they are
automatically created. If no path is defined, the exported logs are
saved at the root of the network storage.
 Purge exported logs: if enabled, logs that have been exported will be
deleted from the equipment. Note that if the export fails, for instance
if the network storage is unreachable, logs are not purged.

You can also click the Export now button to export the logs immediately.
The name of the exported logs file follows the convention below:
ExportLogs_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.txt
where
yyyy is the year
mm is the month
dd is the day
hh is the hour (in 24 hour format)
mm are the minutes
ss are the seconds

For example, the file ExportLogs_20110406_101536.txt was saved on


April, 6th of 2011 at 10:15:36.

Tip: you can open the logs export files in MS Excel.


For a correct display of the dates with MS Excel: select the date column,
right-click and select "Format cell...", and then select the category
"Custom". In the field "Type", enter yyyy/mm/dd-hh:mm:ss.000

86 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

The exported logs file contains all the same categories of information as
this displayed in the Logs tab, as well as additional information that is
useful for a management system equipment.

Table 3-4. Categories of information about logs

Column name in the Column name in


Description
export file the GUI

Severity Severity

Category Category

Type Not available  An event is


punctual, and has a
severity from
information to
critical.
 An alarm has a
duration, and has a
severity from
warning to critical.
 A status has a
duration and has a
severity of
information.

NId Node Id Identifier of the node

JobId Job Id

ProbableCause Not available Identifier

Description Description

UTCStartDate Raising date Start date and time of


the log

UTCEndDate Clearing date End date and time of


the log

Resource Resource

JobName Job name Name and identifier of


the job

JobStartDate Raising file time Start date and time of


the job

JobEndDate Clearing file time End date and time of


the job

The export feature exports all the logs stored in the database.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 87


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Purge
The Purge feature removes logs to clear the database. Only past logs can
be purged.
 Automatically purge: if enabled, the past logs are automatically
removed from the Logs view after a given period. Specify the
parameters.
 Frequency: define how often the past logs should be purged (in days,
weeks or months).
 Keep logs for: specify how long the past logs should be kept (in days,
weeks or months). All older logs will be removed during the automatic
purge.

You can also click the Purge now button to purge the past logs
immediately.

Supervision
This part is purely informative and indicates:
 Percent usage: use rate of the logs database, in percentage. The
database can host up to 1,000,000 logs.
 Number of logs into database.

Hardware Tab
The Hardware tab includes several categories, detailed in the coming
sections.

Hardware/Nodes
The Nodes category provides you with the list of nodes (i.e. blades or
servers) of your ViBE VS7000 system and the distribution of jobs in the
nodes.

Figure 3-58. Nodes category

88 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

The table contains the following items:


 ID: identifier of the node. This ID cannot be modified. It is contained in
the license file.
 State: Master (possible only for a node with disk) or Slave.
 Status (refer to Table 3-1 for status details).
 CPU usage: allocated CPU, as a percentage. Measured usage is
indicated by a vertical bar and can temporarily be higher than
allocated. When a file encoding job is running on the node, the
measured CPU can also be much higher than allocated.
 Memory usage: allocated memory, as a percentage. Measured usage
is indicated by a vertical bar.
 CPU: number and type of CPU.
 Memory: size.
 Disk: number and capacity.
 Description: serial number, vendor, type.

From the Nodes category, you can also:


 Request a new license: click the New license request button.
 Search for the nodes available on the internal system network. If you
want to obtain a list of available nodes click the Discover button.

To find out how to request a license for a new node, refer to Section
’Adding a Diskless Node to Your System’ on page 216.

Hardware/SDI
The SDI category provides a representation of nodes and SDI cards in
your system and lets you configure SDI matrices to manage redundancy.

Figure 3-59. SDI category

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 89


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

SDI Cards
The nodes that contain SDI cards are represented. The slot in which the
SDI card is installed is indicated.

You can double-click the card item to name it and give a name to the
inputs. This will ease configuration when creating workflows and jobs.

SDI Matrices
If you have a matrix in your system, you need to declare it in this view.
The list of supported SDI matrices is available in Table A-29 on page 281.

The GUI displays a representation of the matrices declared in the ViBE


VS7000 equipment.

To find out how to declare a matrix, refer to Section ’Configuring an SDI


System With a Matrix’ on page 65.

You can right-click a matrix item to access the following actions:


 Properties: lets you see the properties defined when creating the
matrix.
 Align (available in edit mode): aligns the items in the view.
 Remove (available in edit mode): removes the matrix.
 Copy crosspoints: copies the internal crosspoints of the matrix, that is
the links between the inputs and outputs of the matrix, to the
clipboard. You can then paste them into a text document (e.g.
Notepad) or Excel document.

You can find the SDI matrix alarms in the Logs panel.

Workflows Tab
The Workflows tab is where you are going to create theoretical groups
of actions, called workflows, that you want to perform. Later, you will
implement (instantiate) them by creating jobs (instances).

This section describes the way workflows work. If you require


information about the workflows provided with your ViBE VS7000
equipment, refer to Section ’Workflow Library Content Parameters’ on
page 130.

The Workflows tab is divided into two main parts:


 The left part contains the list of all the existing workflows.
 The right part displays the detail of the workflows selected from the
list.

90 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Left Area
The left area contains the following elements:
 A series of buttons.
 A search field, that lets you filter the list.
 A list of existing workflows, sorted by category.
 A Description field, that provides information on the actions included
in the workflow that is selected from the list.

Figure 3-60. Left area of the Workflows tab

Buttons
 New: to create a new workflow.
 Delete: to delete the workflow selected from the list.
 Show: to display the details of the workflow selected from the list in
the right area.
 Edit: to display the workflow selected from the list in the right area and
open it in edit mode.
 Create job: to create a job based on the workflow selected from the
list.

Search
You can search in the name of the workflows, in the keywords defined for
the workflows, or in both. Click the arrow on the right of the search field
to choose where to search.

List
The list contains workflows and tools.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 91


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Workflows Library

The list displays the workflows that have been delivered with the
software version, and the workflows that you or another user have
created and saved.

Figure 3-61. Workflows library

The workflows displayed in bold are those that you can use to create
jobs.

The workflows displayed with a lock sign are those delivered with the
software version that you cannot delete nor modify.

Other workflows delivered with the software version can be modified or


deleted.

Tools

Two tools are available: the Choice and the Selector. They both let you
define a condition in your workflow, to choose either the output or the
input that should be used.

The condition can be set on a parameter that is already defined, or on a


new parameter that will be displayed when creating the job.

The first met condition is applied.

The Choice tool applies a condition to choose the output.

The Selector tool applies a condition to choose the input.

For more information on how to use these tools, refer to Section ’Tools’
on page 203.

Description
The description helps you identify the workflow. It is supposed to
indicate what the workflow does. Be sure to fill in the field carefully when
creating a new workflow, as this information is very useful to people who

92 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

create jobs and to people who create other workflows based on the one
you created.

Right Area
The right-area displays the details of workflows.

Tabs
First select a workflow from the list in the left area, and click Show. The
details are displayed in a tab.

Items

To add an item to a workflow, you can either:


 Click items from the list in the left area and drag them to the right area.
 Right-click the interfaces buttons of an existing item and choose Link
to new from the menu. In this case, the option you are pointing with
the mouse pointer is highlighted in the list and the description is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-62. This method is recommended if
you are not sure of which items you can link.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 93


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Figure 3-62. "Link to new" feature

Item selected in the


workflow library

Corresponding
description

To remove an item, you can either:


 Right-click it and choose Remove.
 Click it and press Del on your keyboard.

Links Between Items

To create a link between two items, you can:


 Click the interface button of one item, hold the mouse and drag it to
the interface button of the other item. Note that to help you, the
interface buttons where you are allowed to create your link blink.
 Right-click the interface button of one item, select Link to current and
then choose the other item.

To remove a link, right-click the interface button of one end of the link,
choose Remove link to and then click the name of the other item.

To remove all links to an item, right-click anywhere in the item and


choose Remove all links.

94 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Parameters of the Items

Items each have their own parameters. For more clarity, they are
described in a separate section of this manual. Refer to Section
’Workflow Library Content Parameters’ on page 130.

Buttons
The following buttons are available in this area:
 Parameters: displays the list of public and protected parameters in a
separate panel on the right, i.e. the parameters that are visible
(protected) and editable (public) by job authors. For a full explanation
of the status, refer to Paragraph ’Item Parameters Array’ on
page 130.
 Properties: lets you set the properties of the workflow. You can also
double-click the box of a workflow, located on the top-left corner of the
right area to open this dialog. See ’Properties of the Workflow’
below.
 Edit/Unedit: switches to the edit mode / cancels the changes applied to
the workflow.
 Save: saves the changes applied to the workflow.
 Check: checks the coherence of the workflow. If there are errors, a
summary is displayed. You can click the links to open the item where
the problem is located.
If there is at least one error message, the configuration is not applied.
If there is at least one warning message, a confirmation is required.
 Duplicate: duplicates the workflow.
 Delete: removes the workflow from the list.
 Create job: creates a job based on the workflow.
 Rights: lets you set the rights to see, instantiate, modify, delete or
manage the workflow.

Parameters Panel
Click the Parameters button to display the Parameters panel.

If the workflow is instantiable, this panel lists the parameters that will be
visible by a user who uses this workflow to create a job or to create
another workflow.

Sorting Parameters

By default all the public parameters are displayed in the same panel and
in the same node. If you have a great number of public parameters, you
may want to sort them into nodes and groups.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 95


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Figure 3-63. Parameters panel

To create a new node:

On the left part of the panel, you can click New to create a new node. You
can also click Rename to give names to your nodes.

To create a new group of parameters:


1. Click the New group button.

A new group is created. It appears underneath the list of parameters.

Figure 3-64. New group of parameters

96 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

2. Click the (Rename) button in your new group and give it a proper
name.
3. From the list of parameters, select a parameter and drag it to your new
group.

Figure 3-65. Moving a parameter from a group to another

Repeat these steps as many times as needed to sort all your parameters,
for instance as shown in Figure 3-66.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 97


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Figure 3-66. Parameters sorted

To sort your parameters, you can also:


 Sort the nodes using the Up and Down buttons.
 Drag and drop a parameter to the node and group that suit you.
 Select multiple parameters by pressing the Ctrl key and selecting
successively the parameters to move.

98 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Properties of the Workflow


When creating a workflow, the Properties dialog opens automatically. In
other cases, click the Properties button in the toolbar or double-click the
box of a workflow, located on the top-left corner of the right area.

Figure 3-67. Properties of a workflow

This dialog contains the following fields:


 Name: name of the workflow.
 Category: choose a category for your workflow or create your own
category. For more information, see Paragraph ’Categories and
Colors’ on page 103.
If you choose the Favorites category, the workflow will be in your
Favorites list when creating a new job.
 Summary: text that is displayed:
 On the item when it is used to create a new workflow
 In the preview of the workflow, in the top-left corner of the right
area
 Description: text that is displayed:
 In the Description field of the left area, when the workflow is
selected from the list
 In the job creation view

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 99


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Copy and Paste Options


When manipulating a workflow in the right area, there are several
possibilities to copy and paste items:
 Paste at the location of the mouse pointer: select the item to copy,
press Ctrl + C, then right-click and select paste, or press Ctrl + V.
 Multiple paste: to select several items to copy, hold the Ctrl key and
click the items. You can then copy and paste the items as usual.
 Copy from a workflow to another: you can copy one or several items
from a workflow and paste it/them in another workflow.

When copying and pasting items, only the boxes are copied, not the links
between them.

Parameters Name Conflict

If a parameter you are meaning to publish (paramB) has the same name
as a parameter already published (paramA), a message is displayed to
warn you and it offers you the following options:
 Unpublish: unpublishes paramB, which consequently remains
private.
 Cancel: cancels the action and lets you go back to the edition dialog to
modify the parameters and avoid the name conflict.
 Auto rename: automatically renames paramB by adding a digit at the
end of the name.

Workflow Import and Export Options


Exporting a Workflow

It is possible to export a workflow you created to a zip file. This file


contains your workflow as well as all your workflows it includes. The zip
file is not protected, you may access its content.

There are two ways to export a workflow.

100 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

From the list of workflows:


1. Select a workflow.
2. Click Export.

Figure 3-68. Exporting a workflow selected in the list

You obtain a ZIP file containing the workflow you selected.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 101


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

From the workflow panel


1. Open a workflow.
2. Click Export.

Figure 3-69. Exporting a workflow displayed in the panel

You obtain a ZIP file containing the workflow you selected.

102 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Importing a Workflow

To import a workflow that you have previously exported, or that


someone else has transmitted to you, proceed as follows:
1. In case you have extracted the workflow XML file, include it back in the
ZIP file that resulted from the export operation.
2. Click Import.

Figure 3-70. Exporting a workflow selected in the list

3. Browse to select the ZIP file corresponding to the workflow to import.


Note that you must not modify the ZIP file’s structure, it should remain
the same as an exported one’s.

In case of name conflict between the workflow contained in the zip


and a workflow already present, the imported workflow is renamed
(a popup indicates the new name of the workflow).

4. Click Open.

The workflow is added to the list.

Categories and Colors


A number of categories are defined by default. A color is associated to
each category of workflow.

Colors are used in the list of workflows, and in the headers of the boxes
in the right area.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 103


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Table 3-5 shows the colors associated with the categories available by
default.

Table 3-5. Colors associated to categories of workflows.

Color Associated category

Input

Decoding

Preprocessing

Encoding

Output

Sample

Favorites

You can create your own categories. In this case, you can associate the
color you want with them. Proceed as follows:
1. Click the Properties button.
2. From the Category drop-down list, select Create a new category.
3. Enter a name for your category and pick a color from the color chart.
4. Click Ok.

104 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Jobs Tab
The Jobs tab displays the list of existing jobs in an array.

Double-click a job displays different information about the job:


 The configuration parameters of the job
 The node(s) where the job is executed
 The snapshots (MPEG tree for TS input)
 The logs

Figure 3-71. Jobs tab

Buttons
The following buttons are available:
 Create: lets you create a job from a workflow, to select from the
displayed list.
 Duplicate: duplicates the selected job. In the displayed dialog, enter a
name for the new job, and if necessary, adjust the parameters. Click
Create to validate job creation.
 Start: starts the selected job.
 Stop: stops the selected job. You can then click Start to start the job or
Delete to remove it from the list.
 Edit: Lets you change the job parameters.
 Save: Saves the job parameters.
 Show parameters: displays the job parameters and lets you change
them, displays the job Node distribution and logs.
 Show workflow: displays the workflow that corresponds to the
selected job in the Workflows tab.
 Delete: deletes the selected job.

Jobs Array
The Jobs tab displays the list of existing jobs in an array.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 105


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Figure 3-72. Jobs Array

For each job, the following information is provided:


 Job id: identifier of the job, automatically created.
 Job name: at your convenience. You can modify it in the job
parameters.
 Status: list of possible status and their meaning is provided in
Table 3-7 ’Simulation Status icon meanings’ on page 118.
 State: state of the job. See ’State’ below.
 Workflow: workflow on which the job is based.
 Source: user who created the job.
 Type: real-time or offline.
 Progress: for offline jobs only, indicates the progress percentage of
the job.
 Submission time: date and time of creation of the job.
 Start time: date and time when the job started.
 End time: date and time when the job was completed or stopped.

You cannot modify the values in the array. To change the properties of a
job, click the Show parameters button.

State
Table 3-6 lists the possible states of the jobs, shows the colors
associated with them, provides informations about the states and the
possible actions that you can perform.

106 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Table 3-6. Job states: colors, descriptions and possible actions

Job state and Description of the


Possible actions
color state

The job has been Duplicate: duplicates the selected


created and is waiting job.
before switching to Stop: stops the job.
Running state. Show parameters: displays
information about the job.
Show workflow: displays the
workflow that corresponds to the
selected job in the Workflows tab.

The job is being Duplicate: duplicates the selected


executed. job.
Stop: stops the job.
Show parameters: displays
information about the job.
Show workflow: displays the
workflow that corresponds to the
selected job in the Workflows tab.

Job execution has Duplicate: duplicates the selected


ended. job.
Start: starts the selected job.
Show parameters: displays
information about the job.
Show workflow: displays the
workflow that corresponds to the
selected job in the Workflows tab.
Delete: deletes the job.

The job has been Duplicate: duplicates the selected


created but not started, job.
or started and then Start: starts the selected job.
stopped. Show parameters: displays
information about the job.
Show workflow: displays the
workflow that corresponds to the
selected job in the Workflows tab.
Delete: deletes the job.

Filters and Sorting Options


You can filter and sort the jobs in the array to display only the ones on
which you want to focus.

You can filter the jobs by their state - running, waiting, completed,
stopped - by checking the corresponding boxes.

You can also group the jobs that have similar characteristics by selecting
an option from the Group by list.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 107


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

At the end of the sorting options line, the number of matching jobs is
indicated.

Job Parameters
To display the Job parameters dialog, select a job from the list and click
Show parameters.

Figure 3-73. Job parameters panel

The Job parameters area is displayed on the right side of the view and
shows the following elements in the upper part:
 Workflow: workflow on which the job is based (non-editable).
 Name: name of the selected job.
 Description of the workflow on which the job is based (non-editable).

Below, the view displays the list of job parameters, sorted by categories
displayed in a tree. You can edit the values and apply them, even while
the job is running.

Job Nodes
To display the Job Nodes view, select a job from the list and click Show
parameters and Nodes.

Figure 3-74. Job Nodes view

The following information is provided for the selected job:


 Node id: node used by the job
 State: state of the node

108 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

 Status: status of the node. A list of possible statuses and their


meaning is provided in Table 3-7 ’Simulation Status icon meanings’
on page 118.
 Disk: disk used by the node (possible only for a node with disk)
 Description: node description

Job Logs
To display the Job Logs view, select a job from the list and click Show
parameters and Logs.

Figure 3-75. Job Logs view

The following information is provided for the selected job:


 Severity: see Table 3-7 ’Simulation Status icon meanings’ on
page 118.
 Resource: resource to which the log refers.
 Description: log description.
 Raising date: log raising date and time.
 Clearing date: (for closed logs only): log falling date and time.

You can filter and sort the logs to display only the ones on which you
want to focus. You can apply several types of filters simultaneously.

Job Snapshot
To display the Job Snapshot view, select a job from the list and click
Show parameters and Snapshot.

Figure 3-76. Job Snapshot view

The contents of input for the selected job is showed in a tree.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 109


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Statmux Tab
The Statmux view is both a monitoring and configuration view as it lets
you:
 See the list of components included in the statistical encoding, and
start or stop the corresponding jobs.
 Check and edit the statistical multiplexing job parameters.

Figure 3-77. Statmux view

Array
The array provides, for each statmuxed component, the following
information:
 Name of the job included in the statistical encoding

It is recommended to create one job for each program included in the


MPTS.

 PID of the component


 Minimum bitrate, in bits per second
 Maximum bitrate, in bits per second

110 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

 Quality, in percentage
 Fallback bitrate, in bits per second: this is the bitrate used if the
communication is lost between the allocator and the encoder. This is
not configurable, the value is automatically computed by the
equipment.
 State of the job
 Status of the job

Parameters
The listed parameters are those of the running Statmux job. They are the
same as those displayed in the Jobs view when selecting the job.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 111


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Simulation Tab

Purpose
You can start a new simulation from the Simulation view.

Simulation is used to determine the number of nodes and licenses


required in a new system. You can simulate a new system starting from
an empty configuration or import your current configuration.

In simulation mode
 New workflows or jobs can be added.
 The hardware configuration can be changed to meet the resource
needs of jobs and redundancy.
 The licenses required for job processing are estimated.

The simulation is not saved in the equipment.

When the simulation is satisfactory, you can export it and send it to


Thomson representative to order.

In simulation mode, the GUI no longer represents the actual state of


VS7000, but is dedicated to the simulation.
If you want to continue to supervise the VS7000 during the
simulation, it is necessary to open a new GUI.

Use
Simulation involves several stages:
1. Preparation of the simulation by defining a hardware configuration,
either from an empty configuration or from the current configuration.
Refer to Section ’Create a simulation’ on page 113.
It is possible to import a previously saved simulation. Refer to Section
’Export/Import simulation’ on page 122.
2. Creation, modification and simulation of workflows or jobs.
Refer to Section ’Job Simulation’ on page 117.
3. Simulation status checking
Refer to Section ’Simulation Status’ on page 117.
4. Modification of the hardware configuration to enable job processing,
as required.
Refer to Section ’Operations on nodes’ on page 119.
5. Determining the licenses required for job processing
Refer to Section ’License Simulation’ on page 122.
6. Exporting the simulation, as required
Refer to Section ’Export/Import simulation’ on page 122.

112 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

7. Quitting simulation mode


Refer to Section ’Exit simulation mode’ on page 124.

Create a simulation
 Display the simulation view and click New to create a simulation.

Figure 3-78. Create a Simulation

A simulation can be create from:


 An empty configuration: select this mode if you want to create a new
configuration.
 The current configuration: select this mode if you want to add
processing to the current configuration.

Figure 3-79. Create a Simulation

Simulation from
empty configuration

Simulation from
current configuration

 Simulation from an empty configuration


 Select From empty configuration
In this tab you set the configuration type. The following
parameters must be set:

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 113


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

- Blade center C7000 (10RU): C7000 blade center is added to


the configuration.
The Power Supply must be selected. Choice between
AC 200-240V single phase, AC 208V triple phase, AC 380V
triple phase and DC 48V.
- Blade center C3000 (6RU): C3000 blade center is added to
the configuration.
The Power Supply must be selected. Choice between
AC 100-240V single phase and DC 48V.
- Server 1RU: 1RU Server is added to the configuration.
If necessary, indicate the SDI board(s) in the server. Choice
between No SDI board, Dual port SDI/HD-SDI board, Quad
port SDI/HD SDI board, Octo port SDI board and 2xOcto port
SDI board.
- Number of nodes: number and type of nodes in the
configuration.
- diskless: node(s) without disk
- with disk: node(s) with disk
 Simulation from the current configuration
 Select From current configuration
 Redundancy nodes number: number of node(s) used for redundancy
purposes.
This parameter can also be set in the simulation view. Refer to Section
’Simulation view’ on page 114.
 Check IP configuration
This parameter can also be set in the simulation view. Refer to Section
’Simulation view’ on page 114.
 If this parameter is checked, the actual network parameters will
be taken into account:
-Simulation from empty configuration: the simulation IP
configuration is empty.
-Simulation from current configuration: the current IP
configuration is used in the simulation.
You may modify the simulation IP configuration in SET UP/IP
view.
 If this parameter is unchecked, the actual network parameters
(addresses & bandwidth) will not be taken into account in the
simulation and default values are applied. The values can be set
in the Simulation view. Refer to Section ’Simulation view’ on
page 114.

Simulation view
The Simulation view is displayed after launching simulation.

114 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Figure 3-80. Simulation view

Identical information

SIMULATION STATE PANEL

In the Simulation parameters box


 Redundancy node number: number of nodes reserved for redundancy
purposes.
 Check IP configuration
 If this parameter is checked, the actual network parameters will
be taken into account:
-Simulation from empty configuration: the simulation IP
configuration is empty.
-Simulation from current configuration: the current IP
configuration is used in the simulation.
You may modify the simulation IP configuration in SET UP/IP
view.
 If this parameter is unchecked, the actual network parameters
(addresses & bandwidth) will not be taken into account in the
simulation and default values are applied. The values can be
modified by clicking Advanced parameters:
- Internal data LAN for blade area
Maximum input bitrate: maximum input bitrate for blade
internal data LAN.
Maximum output bitrate: maximum output bitrate for blade
internal data LAN.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 115


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

- Internal data LAN for server area


Maximum input bitrate: maximum input bitrate for server
internal data LAN (link via an external switch).
Maximum output bitrate: maximum output bitrate for
server internal data LAN (link via an external switch).
 Number of servers per Internal data LAN: number of servers per
internal data LAN. All the servers that are in the same internal
data LAN shall be connected on the same single switch
(redunded) for this LAN.

In the Simulation status box


 CPU: Allocated CPU for process the current jobs.
 Memory: Allocated Memory for process the current jobs.
 Simulation Status: Status of the simulation. Refer to Section
’Simulation Status’ on page 117.
 Compute: Launch the simulation if the Simulation Status is
indeterminate. Refer to Section ’Simulation Status’ on page 117.

In the Export box


 Export: Export the simulation. Refer to Section ’Export/Import
simulation’ on page 122.

Simulation State panel

The CPU, Memory and Simulation Status information is identical to


those described above.

116 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Job Simulation
In simulation mode, the procedure for creating / modifying Workflows or
Jobs is identical to the procedures described in Section ’Creating a Job’
on page 42 and Section ’Creating a Workflow’ on page 58.

Job simulation state

The job simulation state is displayed in the Simulation state panel.

Figure 3-81. Job status and Simulation state panel

If a job state is check the cause in the Simulation state panel and
add the necessary resources (node or SDI card for a server). In this case
the Simulation Status below will be .
To add resources refer to Section ’Operations on nodes’ on page 119.

The off line jobs are indicated as running but CPU and memory
resource required for the execution of the jobs are not reserved. You
may check in the simulation state panel the maximum number of
hours of media content that can be encoded per day on a single
node.

Simulation Status
When the above step is completed and all the jobs show status and
state, you need to check the simulation status in the Simulation
view. Refer to Table 3-7 ’Simulation Status icon meanings’ on
page 118.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 117


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Figure 3-82. Simulation Status - Simulation view

Table 3-7. Simulation Status icon meanings

Simulation Status
Meanings
icons

The simulation is valid, all jobs can run on the VS7000


defined, in accordance with the number of nodes
redundancy required.

The simulation is not valid. Either all jobs requested


could not be instantiated or we do not have the number
of redundancy nodes required.
Refer to Section ’Operations on nodes’ on page 119.

The simulation status is indeterminate. Click Compute


to determine it and read the simulation status icon.
Refer to Figure 3-83 ’Simulation computing -
Simulation view’ on page 118.

Figure 3-83. Simulation computing - Simulation view

118 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Operations on nodes
In simulation mode you can modify the number of blade centers, blades
and servers and display their characteristics.

To add or delete a node


 Click Rack category in the Hardware Tab. The current configuration is
displayed.

The Rack category is displayed in simulation mode only.

Figure 3-84. Hardware Tab – Rack category

 Click Edit to enter edit mode.

Figure 3-85. Rack category – Edit mode

By default the hardware type of the added blades is performed to be


the latest available one. If the simulation should be perform using old
hardware, you can change the type of the added blade in Advanced
tab. Click Advanced to select the type of blade, G7 or G8.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 119


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

To add node(s) to new blade center(s) or to add server(s)


 Click Add to add new blade center(s) or server(s).

Figure 3-86. Rack category – Add nodes

 Select the type and the number of node.

For more information on the displayed parameters, refer to Section


’Create a simulation’ on page 113.
 Click Ok
 Click Apply

To add a node to an existing blade center


 Right click the empty location and select the node type to add.

120 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Figure 3-87. Rack category – Add a node to a blade center

 Click Apply

To delete a node or blade center


 Right click the node to delete and select Remove node or right click the
blade center to delete and select Remove rack.

Figure 3-88. Edit mode – Delete a node

 Click Apply

Displaying node or blade information

To display node or blade center information, place the mouse pointer on


the relevant item.

Figure 3-89. Displaying node or blade information

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 121


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

The following information is displayed:


 Node info:
 ID x: identification
 Type: G7, G8, blade, server (SDI board), disk
 Blade info: 6RU, 10RU and Power Supply type
 Commercial ref: commercial reference

License Simulation
The licenses required to process jobs are displayed in the
Setup/Download view.
 Quantity used: Number of licenses required to process jobs.
 Quantity max: Number of licenses available on the equipment.

The licenses which are insufficient in number are displayed in orange. It


has no impact on the simulation state but it indicates the number of
licenses that you must acquire to run the system.

Figure 3-90. Setup/Download view - Licenses

Export/Import simulation
A simulation can be exported to or imported from the same or a different
device. The simulation is stored in a zip file. A Summary.xml file gives the
list of the hardware and licenses needed to run the simulation.

Export simulation

To export an active simulation, click Export in the Simulation view,


specify the pathname to access the storage folder and click Export
simulation file.

122 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Figure 3-91. Export a simulation - Simulation view

Import simulation

To import a simulation, click Import in the Simulation view, specify the


pathname to access the storage folder and click Import simulation file.
You are not allowed to import a simulation if it is already in progress.

Figure 3-92. Import a simulation - Simulation view

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 123


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Exit simulation mode


To exit simulation mode click Exit in the Simulation view. The simulation
content is cleared.

Figure 3-93. Exit simulation mode - Simulation view

Console Tab
The Console tab is available only if you are connected with an
administrator account. It should be used only under the customer
support’s supervision.

Figure 3-94 shows the different areas of the Console tab.

Figure 3-94. Console tab

List of
commands
Debug traces and result of the commands send
send

Field to
enter
commands

The Clear buttons above the command list let you clear the list of
commands.

124 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

The Clear buttons above Debug traces let you clear the Debug trace
messages (in Dynamic mode only).

The Pause button lets you stop scrolling messages to be able to read
them more easily.

Snapshot Tab
The Snapshot view is available for jobs that include a TS file input or a
TS over IP input.

It provides a tree representation of the transport streams’ composition,


basing itself on MPEG, DVB or ATSC tables, as specified in the workflow
or snapshot configuration.

Note that ghosts are not displayed.

Figure 3-95. Snapshot view

To know how to create a snapshot view, refer to Section ’Creating a


Snapshot View’ on page 69.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 125


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Logs Tab

Purpose
The Logs tab, at the bottom of the view, lists all current and past
equipment logs. It contains an array with the list of logs, filters and
sorting options. Logs (current and past) are saved in a database on ViBE
VS7000 hard drives.

Figure 3-96. Logs tab

See Appendix E ’Logs’ for the list of logs.

Logs Array
The array provides the following information for each log:
 Severity: see Table 3-7 ’Simulation Status icon meanings’ on
page 118.
 Node Id: identifier of the node on which the error occurred.
 Category: category of the log. See Section ’Log Categories’ on
page 316 for the list of categories.
 Resource: resource to which the log refers.
 Description: log description.
 Raising date: raising log date and time.
 Clearing date (for closed logs only): falling log date and time.
 Job Id: identifier of the job to which the log relates, if applicable.
 Job name: name of the job to which the log relates, if applicable.
 Raising file time: in file mode, moment in the file when the log was
raised.
 Clearing file time: in file mode, moment in the file when the log was
cleared.

Filters and Sorting Options


You can filter and sort the logs to display only the ones on which you
want to focus. Filters and sorting options are located above the array. You
can apply several types of filters simultaneously.

126 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

From the first drop-down list, you can choose to display only the current
logs, only the past logs or both.

You can filter the logs by their source:


 System: check the System logs box to display the logs that regard the
system.
 Job: choose if you want to display the logs that regard:
 Only the jobs you created: My jobs
 The jobs created by members of your group: Group jobs.
 All jobs.
 Selected jobs: first select jobs in the array of the Jobs tab.
Or select None if you do not want to display logs that regard jobs.

You can also choose to display the logs of only a given severity. Table 3-8
details the options of this filter and the logs consequently displayed.

Table 3-8. Options of the severity filter of the logs.

Option Icon Info Warning Minor Major Critical

Info to critical x x x x x

Warning to critical x x x x

Minor to critical x x x

Major to critical x x

Critical x

At the end of the sorting options line, you can see the number of
displayed logs out of the number of logs that correspond to the filters.

See Appendix E ’Logs’ on page 315 for the list of logs (XML file).

Advanced
Click Advanced to define the number of logs that should be displayed in
the array. This parameter is also taken into accounts for requests related
to the logs.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 127


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

Status Bar
Figure 3-97. Status bar

The status bar gives the following information:


 CPU: graphical indication of the allocated CPU, in percentage, based
on the average value of all nodes of the system except those that are
unreachable or in maintenance mode. Measured usage in indicated by
a green vertical bar.
 Memory: graphical indication of the allocated memory, in percentage,
based on the average value of all nodes of the system except those
that are unreachable or in maintenance mode. Measured usage is
indicated by a green vertical bar.
 Status: general status of the ViBE VS7000 equipment. See Table 3-7
’Simulation Status icon meanings’ on page 118 for the list of
possible statuses.
 Name of the connected user and name of the ViBE VS7000.
 Date and Time
 Export: lets you export a file from the server, containing the whole
system configuration, all the workflows, jobs, and alarms present on
the server.
 Import: lets you import to the server a file precedently generated by
an export command.
 Time zone: lets you force the time zone value to apply to the graphical
user interface, which can be selected among:
 The time zone of the equipment (default value)
 The time zone of the supervision PC device
 Any time zone available in the list

This settings is taken into account for the display of all date and
time values in the client GUI: time in the status bar and logs
raising and clearing times (active and closed) in the Logs
panel, as well as jobs times in the Jobs panel. This setting does
not have any impact on the time of alarms stored in the
database, or on the time in other client GUI connected to the
equipment. This is different from the date and time settings
that you set in the Setup tab, as those apply to the equipment.

 About displays software and hardware information about the


equipment.
 Part number
 Serial number
 Version number

128 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Interface Description

 Options
You can also find contact information for Thomson Video Networks.

Status Bar in simulation mode


In simulation mode, the status bar is modified. If you need details
about Simulation mode, refer to Section ’Simulation Tab’ on
page 112.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 129


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Workflow Library Content Parameters


This section provides details on all the items that can constitute a
workflow. Some parameters are recurrent, others are specific.

Introduction
To access the parameters of an item, double-click the item.

The Properties dialog box displayed for an item always looks the same.
It contains:
 An array with the list of parameters
 An input and/or output category
 A multi-instance check box

Item Parameters Array


The array lists the parameters that should be set for the item. It contains
a row per parameter, and the following columns:
 Name: name of the parameter, not editable.
 Default value: click to enter a default value. This default value is
applied for private and protected parameters. For public parameters,
the default value is proposed but the job author can modify it.
 Publish: choose if the parameter should be:
 Private: the parameter is set and invisible during instantiation.
This is the status you must use when creating a workflow for
parameters that you do not want the job authors to see or
change.
 Protected: the parameter is visible but not editable during
instantiation. Use this status if you want to let the job authors
see the value of a parameter without being able to change it.
 Public: the parameter is visible and editable during instantiation.
Use this status for all parameters that the job authors must set.
 Label: click to choose an explicit name for the parameter, as it will
appear to the workflow user instead of the original name (optional). If
you want to be able to link a parameter to a private parameter, it is
imperative that you give a label to this private parameter.
 Value restriction: double-click to define restrictions for a value. Check
the box and choose a type of restriction:
 Range: enter the minimum and maximum values.

130 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Figure 3-98. Restriction configuration on an item – Range

 List: use this option to restrain the value to a list of values. Enter
the possible values in the list.

Figure 3-99. Restriction configuration on an item – List

 Condition

Figure 3-100. Condition configuration

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 131


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Double-click the elements of the condition to set them:


 Select a parameter from the available parameters. Only the
public parameters with labels are proposed, as well as the
parameters specially created to be used in the condition.
 Choose the operator: equal to, different than, lower than or
superior to.
 Enter a value in the field.
You can use the OR, AND and NOT operators on the right to build a
more complex condition.
 Summary: check the box if you want the parameter to appear in the
summary of the workflow.

Input/Output
Whether the Input and Output categories are available depends on the
nature of the item.

When such a category is available, it lets you publish the input or output
and specify a label, as well as setting some specific parameters.

Publishing Inputs and Outputs


Publishing the input or output is useful if the workflow you create is not
a full, instantiable workflow, but is an intermediate workflow (i.e. a series
of modules) that will later be used in other workflows. In this case, you
may for example publish the input of the first module and the output of
the last module.

To publish an input or output, check the Publish box.

If you want, type a Label in the field.

Figure 3-101. Publishing an output

Specific Input and Output Parameters


For some items, a table is also available and lets you define parameters
for this specific input or output.

For example, in the TS multiplexer output item, you can set if the input
type should be a program or a component.

132 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Figure 3-102. Specific parameters in the TS multiplexer item

Multi-Instance
The multi-instance feature lets you define how many instances of the
workflow you wish to create.

To use the multi-instance feature, check the Multi-instance box. The


following parameters are displayed:
 Disable parameter and set the multi-instance to a dependent input or
output: this option lets you define as many instances as of inputs or
outputs. First publish the input or output you want to use, and then
check this box.
 Name: enter a name for the multi-instance parameter.
 Default value: enter the default number of instances.
 Publish: set the publication status for the multi-instance parameter.

Common Parameters
Parameters or tools that are systematically or commonly found in the
items are described in this section.

Conditioned Parameters Display Button


A workflow can contain a large number of parameters; some of them
being conditioned on other parameters’ values. These are called
conditioned parameters.

By default, conditioned parameters are hidden in the list of parameters


and are displayed automatically when you select an option that requires
setting other parameters. This prevents you from setting parameters that
will not be used in the configuration.

If you want to display all parameters nonetheless, you can click the
button. Conditioned parameters that should be hidden are greyed.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 133


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Publication Mode Switch Button


The button lets you apply the same publication mode to all the
parameters of a workflow. The mode switches from public to protected
and then private. Click the button until you reach the publication mode
that suits you.

This is useful when you need to change the publication mode to a large
number of parameters in a workflow.

Link Tool
When making a configuration where the same parameter is asked
several times, it can be useful to set it once and then make a reference
back to it. This is what the link tool is for. It lets you make a reference to
a parameter that is already specified in another item.

The following conditions should be respected:


 The two parameters must be of the same type.
 The two parameters must have the same restrictions (for example,
have the same length or the same range).
 The parameter toward which the link will be made must be public, or
private with a label defined.

Example: lets us consider a workflow that contains 2 TS over IP inputs,


and we want to set the synchro loss threshold to the same value in both
inputs. In this case, we can set the value in the first input item, and insert
a link from the second input to the first one.

To use the link tool, proceed as follows:


1. Open an item. In our example, open the second TS over IP input item.

134 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

2. Select the parameter for which you wish to make a link to another
parameter. In our example, the Synchro loss threshold.
3. Click the button located in the top-right corner.

Figure 3-103. Setting a link to another parameter

4. Select the parameter that should be used. In our example, select the
synchro loss threshold of the first TS over IP input item.

Figure 3-104. Selecting the parameter to link with

In the item, you can see that there is now a link to the other parameter.

Figure 3-105. Link established between two parameters

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 135


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

You can click the link to open the item in which the parameter is specified.

To remove the link, select the parameter and click the button again.

In case you try to remove the item toward which a link is made, a
message is displayed to warn you. Click Cancel to cancel the removal, or
OK to proceed, knowing that the links will be broken.

Specific Parameters
This section lists all items and details their specific parameters. Items are
sorted by category.

Workflow Library: Inputs

Input/TS over IP Input


The TS over IP input item lets you manage an MPEG-2 transport stream
over UDP/IP or RTP/UDP/IP.

MPTS and SPTS are supported.

CBR and VBR (i.e. without stuffing packets) transport streams are
supported.

Figure 3-106. TS over IP input parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 IP address: set the IP and LAN parameters. If it is a unicast address, it
must be part of a local network and must be consistent with the IP
configuration of the ViBE VS7000.
 UDP port: enter the port used to get the stream.

136 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Select source IP address: set to true if you want to choose the source
of the stream. In this case, fill in the Source IP address field. You can
specify only one source IP address. If you do this, the operating mode
varies according to the type of IP stream (multicast or unicast) and the
IGMP version indicated in the VS7000 setup parameters (Setup tab, IP
category):
- Multicast, IGMP v2: IGMP requests cannot contain the
source IP address because IGMP v2 does not allow it.
Therefore, IGMP requests only ask the multicast address.
When a datagram is received, it is discarded if it does not
come from the specified source IP address.
- Multicast, IGMP v3: IGMP v3 request use the SSM mode
and can specify the source IP address.
- Unicast: when a datagram is received, it is discarded if it
does not come from the specified source IP address.
 Synchro loss threshold: set the number of milliseconds after which the
absence of signal in input is considered a loss of synchronization.
 Maximum TS bitrate: enter the maximum bit rate of the transport
stream, in bits per second. Be sure to set a correct value as the system
will use it to decide which node will be able to manage this input.
 Define backup input: set to true if you want to define a backup input
for this input. In that case, enter values in the Backup input IP address
and Backup input UDP port fields.
 Monitoring view: set to True if you want to create a snapshot view for
this input. In this case, indicate the Standard that the input stream
respects (DVB, MPEG-2 or ATSC). For more information on snapshot
views, refer to Section ’Creating a Snapshot View’ on page 69.

Input/TS File Input


The TS file input item supports MPTS and SPTS:
 CBR and VBR (i.e. without stuffing packets) SPTS are supported.
 CBR MPTS are supported.

Figure 3-107. TS file input parameters

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 137


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 TS file network storage (mounting point): location on the server where
the TS file to import in input is stored.
 TS file folder: folder on the network storage where the TS file to import
in input is stored.
 TS file name: name of the TS file to import in input.
 Iterations: number of consecutive times the file will be played.

Loops are not seamless: there are continuity counter errors, and
audio/video disruption.

 Monitoring view: set to True if you want to create a snapshot view for
this input. In this case, indicate the Standard that the TS file to import
respects (DVB, MPEG-2 or ATSC). For more information on snapshot
views, refer to Section ’Creating a Snapshot View’ on page 69.

The TS bitrate is automatically computed from the file PCRs.

Input/TS Audio Video Extractor


The TS Audio Video Extractor item lets you extract an audio or a video
stream from a transport stream. The output stream may for instance be
forwarded to a decoder.

Figure 3-108. TS audio video extractor parameters

The parameters you set here act as filters for component extraction, i.e.,
the VS7000 will extract the first component it finds that matches the
parameters you defined.

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Component type: audio or video.

138 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Program number: source program number of the audio or video


component. You may enter the value directly in the field or use a
predefined value:
 First one: the first program referenced in the PAT is processed.
 All: all the programs referenced in the PAT are processed.
 PMT PID: choose Auto to detect automatically the value, or specify it
manually.
 Component PID: PID of the audio or video component. You may enter
the value directly in the field or use a predefined value:
 First one: the first component of the PMT that matches the
specified criteria is processed.
 All: all the components of the PMT that match the specified
criteria are processed.
 Codec (not available if Video compression type is set to Contribution):
H.264, MPEG-2, AAC, MPEG-1 Layer 2 or AC3. If set to Any, the codec
is automatically detected.
 Align timestamps: if set to false, original timestamps are kept. If set to
true, the component is timestamped with system clock. This allows for
instance to create a mosaic. Indeed, in this case, when creating a
program using different components that originate from various
programs, it is necessary to align the clocks of these different
components.

For video components, also set the following parameters:


 Video compression type: the Contribution choice is available in option
(’VS7000-LIC-DHDCON’). Use it for high bitrate streams. Note that
this setting requires more CPU resources.
 Maximum format (useful only for a video component): maximum
format that this input can receive. This information is essential for the
load-balancer as it will use it to allocate resources (CPU, memory,
license). Setting an HD format when the source is SD results in ViBE
VS7000 system underuse.
If you choose custom, set the Maximum picture size and Maximum
frame rate fields.

For audio components, also set the following parameters:


 Maximum number of audio channels: if the expected audio if 5.1, set
this value to 6, if it is stereo, set this value to 2, and if it is mono, set
this value to 1.
 Language: leave to Any if you do not want to specify the language of
the audio component, or use the ISO codes1 to specify it (for instance,
enter eng for English, spa for Spanish, etc.).

1. For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-

ter=%25

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 139


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Input/TS Component Extractor


The TS Component Extractor item extracts the transport packets of a
component from a program of an MPEG-2 TS.

Figure 3-109. TS component extractor parameters

If the output is linked to a TS multiplexer item, the input descriptors


will be kept in the output TS.

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Type: type of the component to be extracted:
 Program component: a component of a program is extracted.
 Ghost component: any component is extracted. In this case,
indicate the First ghost PID and the Last ghost PID so as to define
a range of PIDs to extract. This mode is not suitable to extract a
dated component (e.g.: a video). It can however be used to send
a PSI/SI/PSIP table in TS output (in pass-through, without
processing).
 Program number: source program number of the component. You
may enter the value directly in the field or use a predefined value:
 First one: the first program referenced in the PAT is processed.
 All: all the programs referenced in the PAT are processed.
 PMT PID: choose Auto to detect automatically the value, or specify it
manually.
 Component PID: PID of the component. You may enter the value
directly in the field or use a predefined value:
 First one: the first component of the PMT that matches the
specified criteria is processed.
 All: all the components of the PMT that match the specified
criteria are processed.

140 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Component Type: Any, Audio, Video or Custom.


 If set to Custom, indicate the Stream type.
 If not set to Video, set the Language.
 Language: leave to Any if you do not want to specify the language of
the audio component, or use the ISO codes1 to specify it (for instance,
enter eng for English, spa for Spanish, etc.).
 Align timestamps: if set to false, original timestamps are kept. If set to
true, the component is timestamped with system clock. This allows for
instance to create a mosaic. Indeed, in this case, when creating a
program using different components that originate from various
programs, it is necessary to align the clocks of these different
components.

Input/SDI Input

Figure 3-110. SDI input parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 SDI input: number of the physical SDI input to use. The names set in
the SDI category of the Hardware tab are available in the list.
 Maximum video format: PAL, NTSC, or a variety of HD resolutions.
 Number of audio components: enter the number of audio
components that the SDI input contains. For each component, set the
following parameters:
 Mode: 5.1, stereo, mono left or mono right.

1. For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-

ter=%25

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 141


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Source L/R: select the audio component to be extracted from the


SDI signal.
An SDI signal can contain several audio channels which can be
dissociated (dual mono mode) or associated (stereo mode). Two
mono audios or one stereo audio form an AES/EBU mux.
AES/EBU mux are grouped into pairs, each one forming a group.
An AES/EBU mux is referenced by the group number and the
number of the AES/EBU mux in the group. The term channel in
the audio source parameter in fact refers to the channel pair
number.
 Source C/LFE (5.1 mode): select the Center & Low Frequency
Effects audio component to be extracted from the SDI signal.
 Source Ls/Rs (5.1 mode): select the Right surround & Left
surround audio component to be extracted from the SDI signal.
 Default display aspect ratio: 16/9 or 4/3.
 Display aspect ratio mode: Auto (WSS or AFD when WSS is absent),
Auto (WSS), Auto (AFD), Manual.
 Display aspect ratio when WSS and AFD are absent: in case WSS and
AFD are absent, define whether the VS7000 should Keep last
WSS/AFD or Use default display aspect ratio.
 Raise a log when WSS and AFD are absent: set to true if you want to
see a log for this absence.
 Number of Dolby components: if you wish to extract Dolby audio
components from the SDI input, indicate the number of components
you wish to extract. Then, for each component, indicate the group and
channel of the Dolby source in the Dolby x: source field. For more
details on groups and channels, see the Source L/R parameter
explanation above.

For more information on SDI inputs, see also Section ’SDI Inputs’ on
page 280.

Input/MP4 File Input

Figure 3-111. MP4 file input parameters

142 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 MP4 file network storage (mounting point): location on the server
where the MP4 file to import in input is stored.
 MP4 file folder: folder on the network storage where the MP4 file to
import in input is stored.
 MP4 file name: name of the MP4 file to import in input.
 Iterations: number of consecutive times the file will be played.

Loops are not seamless: there is audio/video disruption.

Input/MP4 Audio Video Extractor


The MP4 Audio Video Extractor item lets you extract an audio or video
component from an MP4 file. The output stream can be forwarded to a
decoder, for example.

Figure 3-112. MP4 audio video extractor parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Component type: indicate if you want to extract an Video or Audio
component.
 If set to Video, also set the Maximum format: maximum format
that this input can receive. This information is essential for the
load-balancer as it will use it to allocate resources (CPU,
memory, license). Setting an HD format when the source is SD
results in ViBE VS7000 system underuse.
If you choose custom, set the Maximum picture size and
Maximum frame rate fields.
 If set to Audio, also set the following parameters:
- Maximum number of audio channels: if the expected audio
if 5.1, set this value to 6, if it is stereo, set this value to 2, and
if it is mono, set this value to 1.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 143


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

- Language: leave to Any if you do not want to specify the


language of the audio component, or use the ISO codes1 to
specify it (for instance, enter eng for English, spa for
Spanish, etc.).
 Track ID: you may enter the value directly in the field or use a
predefined value:
 First one: the first track that matches the criteria.
 All: all the tracks that match the criteria.
 Codec: H.264, MPEG-2, AAC, MPEG-1 Layer 2 or AC3. If set to Any, the
codec is automatically detected.
 Align timestamps: if set to false, original timestamps are kept. If set to
true, the component is timestamped with system clock. This allows for
instance to create a mosaic. Indeed, in this case, when creating a
program using different components that originate from various
programs, it is necessary to align the clocks of these different
components.

Input/PS File Input

Figure 3-113. PS file input parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 PS file network storage (mounting point): location on the server where
the PS file to import in input is stored.
 PS file folder: folder on the network storage where the PS file to import
in input is stored.
 PS file name: name of the PS file to import in input.
 Iterations: number of consecutive times the file will be played.

1.For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-


ter=%25

144 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Input/PS Audio Video Extractor

Figure 3-114. PS audio video extractor parameters

The parameters you set here act as filters for the component extraction,
that is, the VS7000 will extract the first component it finds that matches
the parameters you defined.

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Component type: audio or video
 Codec: H.264, MPEG-2, AAC, MPEG-1 Layer II, AC3. If set to Any, the
codec is automatically detected.
 Stream Id: Stream identifier
 Align timestamps: if set to false, original timestamps are kept. If set to
true, the component is timestamped with system clock. This allows for
instance to create a mosaic. Indeed, in this case, when creating a
program using different components that originate from various
programs, it is necessary to align the clocks of these different
components.

For video components, also set the following parameters:


 Maximum format (useful only for a video component): maximum
format that this input can receive. This information is essential for the
load-balancer as it will use it to allocate resources (CPU, memory,
license). Setting an HD format when the source is SD results in ViBE
VS7000 system underuse.
If you choose custom, set the Maximum picture size and Maximum
frame rate fields.

For audio components, also set the following parameters:


 Maximum number of audio channels: if the expected audio if 5.1, set
this value to 6, if it is stereo, set this value to 2, and if it is mono, set
this value to 1.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 145


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Language: leave to Any if you do not want to specify the language of


the audio component, or use the ISO codes1 to specify it (for instance,
enter eng for English, spa for Spanish, etc.).

Input/YUV File Input

Figure 3-115. YUV file input parameters

The parameters you set here act as filters for the component extraction,
that is, the VS7000 will extract the first component it finds that matches
the parameters you defined.

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 YUV file network storage (mounting point): location on the server
where the YUV file to import in input is stored.
 YUV file folder: folder on the network storage where the YUV file to
import in input is stored.
 YUV file name: name of the YUV file to import.
 Format: format of the YUV file to import. If set to Custom, also set the
following parameters:
 Picture size: size of the picture in pixels (H; V).
 Frame rate: picture frames per second. This can be a decimal
value.
 Display aspect ratio: aspect ratio of the picture (4:3, 16:9 ...).
 Iterations: number of consecutive times the file will be played.

1.For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-


ter=%25

146 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Workflow Library: Decoding

Decoding/Video Decoder
The Video Decoder item is able to decode video in MPEG-2 or H.264
format.

For this item, you must set the following parameter:


 Output frame rate (useful only if Support input variable frame rate is
true): choose the max frame rate.

Decoding/Audio Decoder
The Audio Decoder item is able to decode audio AAC-LC, AAC-HE v1,
AAC-HE v2, AC-3/AC-3+, MPEG-1 Layer 2 or MPEG-2 Layer 2format.

Figure 3-116. Audio decoder parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameter:


 Dolby stereo downmixing (useful only if the incoming audio is Dolby
Digital 5.1 audio, otherwise the parameter is ignored whatever its
value): if set to true, the decoder can provide stereo in output.

Workflow Library: Preprocessing

Preprocessing/Audio Mixer
The Audio Mixer item lets you modify the number of audio channels.

Figure 3-117. Audio mixer parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameter:


 Mode: audio, stereo or 5.1.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 147


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Preprocessing/Audio Loudness Control


The Audio Loudness Control item can enable automatic or static
loudness control, or a peak limiter.

Figure 3-118. Audio loudness control parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Loudness mode: choose from the list the mode to apply: Automatic
loudness control, Peak limiter or Static loudness control.

148 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Figure 3-119. Automatic loudness control

Noise level Loudness target


30
20
10
Peak limiter 0
-10 Audio
volume
Gain compression -20
in
-30 output
-40 (dB)
-50
-60
-70
-80
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30
Audio volume in input (dB)

Caption
Audio level if no processing is applied
Audio level under noise level
Audio level with gain compression applied
Audio level with peak limiter applied

If the mode is set to Automatic loudness control, set the following


parameters:
 ALC mode: audio filtering can be applied at the input of the loudness
analyzer module. A typical application is to cut the low frequencies,
which leads to reducing their impact on the leveler. Three modes are
proposed:
 FLAT: no frequency weighting, no psycho-acoustic models.
 EBU R128: standard ITU-1770 with frequency weighting
(K-weighting mode)
 A-weighting: standard IEC 61672:2003

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 149


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Figure 3-120. Automatic loudness control block diagram

The leveler is a limiter (compressor with an infinite ratio) with slow


timing.
The Peak compressor is a compressor with fast timing. It acts on the
peaks that remain in the attack phase of the leveler.
The Hard limiter is a limiter with very fast timing. When enabled, it
removes the remaining loudness peaks after leveling and peak
compressing.
The output stage is equipped with a soft clipper to avoid any hard
digital clipping.
 Compression ratio: ratio applied on the input level to compress the
audio dynamic. The higher the ratio is, the lower the output audio
dynamic will be.
 Noise level: level of noise below which the audio level is ignored by
the loudness analysis, in decibels or loudness units relative to full
scale (LUFS). Signal below this level is modified equally (without
audio dynamic modification) according to the compression ratio and
the loudness target.
 Loudness target: audio level to which the output level is modified. In
decibels in the case of FLAT or A-weighting ALC mode, or loudness
units relative to full scale (LUFS) in the case of EBU R128 ALC mode.

The loudness level and correction are processed on the fly.


Integrated in the long-term scale the loudness level may be lower
than the entered loudness target.

If the mode is set to Peak limiter, set the following parameter:


 Loudness target: audio level to which the audio input is limited, in
decibels. It corresponds to the Automatic Loudness Control in Flat
mode with a Compression ratio set to 1.

150 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

If the mode is set to Static loudness control, set the following


parameters:
 Left gain: in decibels. For a mono input, the left gain is applied.
 Right gain: in decibels.
 Center gain: in decibels.
 Left surround gain: in decibels.
 Right surround gain: in decibels.
 LFE gain: Low Frequency Effects channel, in decibels.

Preprocessing/Audio Resampler
The Audio resampler item lets you modify the sampling frequency.

Figure 3-121. Audio resampler parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameter:


 Resampling frequency: choose the resampling frequency you wish to
apply from the drop-down list, in kilo Hertz.

Preprocessing/Audio Delay
The Audio delay item lets you advance or delay the audio input.

Figure 3-122. Audio delay parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameter:


 Delay: in milliseconds.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 151


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Preprocessing/Audio Processing
The Audio Processing item processes uncompressed audio.

It is a workflow that groups several other existing workflows. All


parameters are already described in the corresponding sections:
 Audio resampler: see Section ’Preprocessing/Audio Resampler’ on
page 151
 Audio loudness control: see Section ’Preprocessing/Audio
Loudness Control’ on page 148
 Audio delay: see Section ’Preprocessing/Audio Delay’ on page 151
 Audio mixer: see Section ’Preprocessing/Audio Mixer’ on page 147

Preprocessing/Chunker
The Chunker item lets you define chunks for adaptive bitrate outputs. It
defines the video frames that will be encoded as IDR frames among all
following encoders.

There is no need to define chunks for audio components.

Figure 3-123. Chunker parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameter:


 Chunk duration: enter the duration of the chunk, in seconds.

Preprocessing/Logo Inserter
The Logo inserter item lets you insert a logo in a video.

Figure 3-124. Logo inserter parameters

152 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameter:


 X and Y: position of the upper left corner of the logo. It is relative to
the upper left corner of the video.
 Transparency: transparency percentage to apply to the logo.
 Logo file network storage (mounting point): location on the network
where the logo file to insert is stored.
 Logo file name (relative path included): name of the logo file to insert.
 Mute: if set to true, the logo disappears.

Preprocessing/Clipping
The Clipping item lets you clip a video.

Figure 3-125. Clipping parameters

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 153


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Adaptive clipping:
 Set to false if you wish to apply the same clipping parameters
whatever the display aspect ratio of the incoming video. In this
case, set the clipping parameters in the Parameters tab (see
below), and ignore the lower part of the view.
 Set to true if you want to apply specific parameters depending
on the incoming display aspect ratio (DAR). In this case, indicate
the number of different incoming display aspect ratios for which
you wish to specify the clipping parameters in the Number of
Display Aspect Ratio field. Then, check the Set specific
configuration for Number of Display Aspect Ratio box.
For each DAR, a specific tab is displayed in the lower part of the
view. For each one, indicate the display aspect ratio of the
source video for your scenario in this Input DAR field, and set
the clipping parameters (see below). If the source video does
have this DAR, the corresponding clipping is applied.

Clipping Parameters
 Cropped area X and Y: location of the upper left corner of the area to
crop, in pixels.
 Cropped area size: size of the area to crop, in pixels.
 Output size: enter the size that the video should have after clipping, in
pixels.
 Insertion area X and Y: location of the upper left corner where the
cropped area should be inserted in the output video, in pixels.
 Background color: enter the values of the red, green and blue
components.

Preprocessing/Deinterlace
The Deinterlace item detects if the video is interlaced and deinterlaces if
necessary.

If the video has to be resized, do not use this Deinterlace module, directly
use the Resize module instead (for instance, 1080i to 720p).

For this item, there are no particular parameters to set.

Preprocessing/DVB Subtitle Inserter


The DVB Subtitle Inserter item lets you extract the DVB subtitles
contained in a TS input program and insert them in the associated video.
Subtitles are thus inserted before the video is encoded.

Connect this item, as shown in Figure 3-126, with:


 On input 1: the Video decoder’s output.

154 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 On input 2: the output of the TS component extractor configured to


extract the PID that contains the DVB subtitles.

Figure 3-126. DVB subtitle inserter connection with inputs

Figure 3-127. DVB subtitle inserter parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameter:


 DVB subtitle composition page ID: indicate the identifier of the
composition page of the DVB subtitle that should be inserted. If set to
Auto, the first detected subtitle is inserted.

Preprocessing/Frame Rate
The Frame Rate item lets you modify the frame rate of a video.

Figure 3-128. Frame rate parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameter:


 Frame rate: in frames per second. This can be a decimal value, for
instance 14.97 fps.
 Web TV: adaptation to external packager: set to True if all the following
conditions are met:
 A channel contains adaptive bitrate streams with different frame
rates.
 An external packager is used.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 155


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 The internal design of the external packager requires that the


IDR frame of all the chunks of a given period has the same PTS.
In this case, an adaptation may be necessary.
If the external packager does not have this limitation, do not use this
parameter as it may reduce the video quality.
This parameter is ignored when there is no chunker before the frame
rate adaptation.

Preprocessing/Resize
The Resize item lets you resize a video.

It manages interlace/progressive conversion. Examples: 1080i50 to


720p50 (which includes a duplication of the frame rate), 1080i59.94 to
720p29.97 (same frame rate). It is thus not necessary to add a deinterlace
processing before the resize when the input is interlaced and the output
is progressive.

Figure 3-129. Resize parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Output size: select a standard format for the destination frame from
the drop-down list or select Custom and set your own values for the
width and the height in the Custom output size field.
 Output frame structure: choose if the video structure should be
Progressive or Interlaced.
 Modify frame rate: if set to False, the input frame rate is kept in output.
If set to True, define the Output frame rate in frames per second.
For instance, if you want to change a 1080i60 input into a 720p60
output, you need to duplicate the output frame rate; using this
parameter will give you the best video quality for this case.
 Horizontal resize: set to true to reduce the size of the video only
horizontally. In this case, from the Ratio drop-down list, select a
percentage of the original size to apply.

156 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Preprocessing/Mosaic Editor
The Mosaic Editor item generates a mosaic of video thumbnails.

Figure 3-130. Mosaic editor general parameters

For this item, you must set the following general parameters:
 Mosaic size: choose a predefined SD or HD format, or set to Custom
and specify a Background picture size, which is the size of the file that
will be used as the mosaic background, in pixels.
 Background display aspect ratio: choose from the list the display
aspect ratio that should be used for the mosaic background.
 Mosaic frame rate: enter the frame rate that will be applied to the
stream, in frames per second.
 Use background color:
 Set to True to use a color as background. In this case, specify the
Background color (RGB value).
 Set to False to use a picture as background. In this case, set the
following parameters:
- Resize the input picture for the background: set to true if
your background input picture is not the same size as the
mosaic you are creating. In that case, it is resized to fit into
the background.
- Background file network storage (mounting point): location
of the file that will be used as the mosaic background.
- Background file name (relative path included): name of the
file that will be used as the mosaic background.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 157


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Figure 3-131. Mosaic editor specific parameters

Link inputs to add thumbnails to your mosaic. For each linked input, you
must also set the following specific parameters:
 Thumbnail size: size to which the input will be resized. Choose a
format from the list or choose Custom and specify your values in the
Custom thumbnail size field.
 X and Y: position of the upper left corner of the thumbnail, relative to
the upper left corner of the background.
 Thumbnail order: order used if a thumbnail partially covers another
one, to know which thumbnail should be on top of the other, 0 being
in front of 1, etc. Make sure you do not use twice the same value as
the overlap would then be random.

Preprocessing/Text Inserter
The Text inserter item lets you insert a crawling or static text in video.
The text source can be a file or entered by the user (manual source).

Figure 3-132. Text inserter parameters

Text source = manual Text source = file

158 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Incrustation type: indicate the type of incrustation
 Input frame structure (displayed if Incrustation type = Scrolling):
structure of the frame in which the text is inserted.
 Text source: indicate the source of the text.
 Text content (displayed if Text source = manual): enter the text to
display.
 Text file network storage (mounting point) (displayed if Text source =
file): server location where the text file is stored.
 Text file folder (displayed if Text source = file): folder on the network
storage where the text file is stored.
 Text file name storage (displayed if Text source = file): name of the text
file.

Any modification of the file is immediately reflected on the insertion.


If the file is empty, there is no insertion.
If the file is missing, there is no insertion.
If the remote directory is inaccessible (network problem, for
example), the last insertion persists (a job stop-start clears the
insertion).

 File encoding type (displayed if Text source = file): encoding type of


the text file. If the text file type is not displayed, the file must be
converted to an available type.
 Direction (displayed if Incrustation type = Scrolling): direction of
movement of the text.
 Orientation (displayed if Incrustation type = Static): orientation of the
text.
 Speed (displayed if Incrustation type = Scrolling): speed of movement
of the text (in pixels/s).

Applied speed can be different from the requested speed. For


smooth overlay, the text will be moved to a whole number of pixels
between two images.

 Blank between text occurrences (displayed if Incrustation type =


Scrolling): if set to auto, the beginning of the text is displayed when
the end of the text is no longer displayed. If set to Custom also set:
 Size of blank between text occurrences: space between the end
and beginning of the text (in pixels).
 Text color (RGB): color of the text (0,0,0 corresponds to a white text).
 Font: select the font you wish to apply from the drop-down list. If set
to Custom also set:
 Font file network storage (mounting point): server location
where the font file is stored.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 159


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Font file folder: folder on the network storage where the font file
is stored.
 Font file name: name of the font file.
 Font size: size of the font.
 Text stroke: if set to false there is no stroke around the text. If set to
true also set:
 Text stroke color (RGB): color of the stroke (0,0,0 corresponds to
a white stroke).
 Text stroke width: width of the stroke (in pixels).
 Background: if set to false there is no background. If set to true also
set:
 Background color (RGB): color of the background (255, 255, 255
corresponds to a black background).
 Background transparency: transparency of the background
(100% corresponds to a fully transparent background).
 Background margin height: height of the background on either
side of the text.
 Incrustation width (displayed if Incrustation type = Scrolling and
Direction = horizontal): width of the text box. If set to Full screen also
set:
 Y: vertical position of the beginning of the text box (in pixels, 0
corresponds to the top).
If set to Custom also set:
 Custom incrustation width: width of the text box (in pixels).
 Y: vertical position of the beginning of the text box (in pixels, 0
corresponds to the top).
 X: horizontal position of the beginning of the text box (in pixels,
0 corresponds to the left).
 Incrustation height (displayed if Incrustation type = Scrolling and
Direction = vertical): height of the text box. If set to Full screen also set:
 X: horizontal position of the beginning of the text box (in pixels,
0 corresponds to the left).
If set to Custom also set:
 Custom incrustation height: height of the text box (in pixels).
 Y: vertical position of the beginning of the text box (in pixels, 0
corresponds to the top).
 X: horizontal position of the beginning of the text box (in pixels,
0 corresponds to the left).
 X (displayed if Incrustation type = Static): horizontal position of the
beginning of the text box (in pixels, 0 corresponds to the left).

160 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Y (displayed if Incrustation type = Static): vertical position of the


beginning of the text box (in pixels, 0 corresponds to the top).

Workflow Library: Encoding

Encoding/AAC-HE v2 Encoder
The AAC-HE v2 encoder item is able to encode audio in AAC-LC, AAC-HE
v1 and AAC-HE v2 format. It generates a raw audio stream.

Figure 3-133. AAC-HE v2 encoder parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 AAC type: choose the format from the list.
 Bitrate: enter the bitrate of the audio stream, in bits per second.
 Signaling mode: choose the mode from the list:
 Implicit and Explicit backward: a player that supports only
AAC-LC will be able to decode the AAC-LC part of the stream.
 Explicit hierarchical: the stream cannot be decoded by a player
that supports only AAC-LC. This ensures that listeners will get
the full audio quality.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 161


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Encoding/MPEG-2 Video Encoder


The MPEG-2 video encoder item is able to encode MPEG-2 video in
format 4:2:0, 8 bits, SD and HD format.

Figure 3-134. MPEG-2 video encoder parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Bitrate: enter the bit rate value (without encapsulation overhead), in
bits per second.
 Profile: select from the drop-down list the profile you wish to apply:
 Main: I, P and B pictures are encoded.
 Simple: only I and P pictures are encoded.
 Level: select from the drop-down list the level you wish to apply:
 Low: the maximum horizontal resolution is 352, the maximum
vertical resolution is 288, and the maximum bit rate in Main
profile is 4 Mbps.
 Main: the maximum horizontal resolution is 720, the maximum
vertical resolution is 576, and the maximum bit rate in Main
profile is 15 Mbps.
 High1440: the maximum horizontal resolution is 1440, the
maximum vertical resolution is 1152, and the maximum bit rate
in Main profile is 20 Mbps.
 High: the maximum horizontal resolution is 1920, the maximum
vertical resolution is 1152, and the maximum bit rate in Main
profile is 20 Mbps.
 Interlace support: if set to true, interlaced streams will be handled.
 Display Aspect Ratio: leave to Auto to compute automatically the
display aspect ratio from the input video one and take into account the
video processing you may have added (clipping, for example). If you
want to force the ratio, enter it manually in the editable list (for
instance: 16:9 and 1.33).
 I period: maximum size of the GOP.

162 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Minimum I period: minimum size of the GOP.


 P period:
 1 if the GOP contains no B frame
 2 if a B frame is present between each P frame
 3 if two B frames are present between each P frame
 etc.
 Closed GOP period: set to 0 for no periodicity, 1 for every GOP, 2 for
every second GOP, etc.
 Decoder delay: this parameter is associated to the decoder buffer.
Increasing this delay improves the quality. However, the zapping time
is longer.

Encoding/MPEG-1 Layer 2 Encoder


The MPEG-1 layer 2 encoder item lets you encode audio in MPEG-1
layer 2 format.

Figure 3-135. MPEG-1 layer 2 encoder parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Bitrate: enter the bit rate value (without encapsulation overhead), in
bits per second.
 Stereo mode: choose the stereo mode to use from the drop-down list.
Available modes are:
 Joint stereo: removes stereo intensity irrelevance
 Stereo
 Dual channel: uncorrelated (contains two completely different
audio streams but encodes them together).
This parameter is ignored when the input is mono.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 163


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Encoding/H.264 AVC Encoder


The H.264 AVC encoder item is able to encode H.264 AVC video in 4:2:0,
8 bits, from low resolution up to UHD.

When the input video is chunked, an IDR frame is set at the beginning
of the chunk. This overrides the configuration parameters.

Figure 3-136. H.264 AVC encoder parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:

164 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Rate mode: indicate if the component bitrate should be CBR, Capped


VBR or Statmux. If set to Capped VBR, indicate the characteristics of
the video component, as shown hereafter.
The table below lists the bitrate values that are used according
to your video resolution.

Table 3-9. Recommended values for minimum and maximum bitrates in capped VBR
mode

Minimum bitrate Maximum bitrate


Video resolution
(kbps) (kbps)

HD1080i50/60 1000 12000

HD720p50/60 800 8000

SD 300 6000

It is not possible to use values outside of the bitrate range, and


it is not recommended to reduce the bitrate range.

If you set the minimum bitrate to a lower valuer than the minimum
value of the range, the value applied is the minimum value on the
range, and inversely for the maximum bitrate.

 Min bitrate: indicate the minimum bitrate that the video


component should have.
 Max bitrate: indicate the maximum bitrate that the video
component should have.
 Rate Control Quality: set the picture quality level required, in
percentage. The value must be between 30 and 90% (best
quality). Default value: 70%.
 Bitrate: enter the bit rate value (without encapsulation overhead), in
bits per second.
 Profile: select from the drop-down list the profile you wish to apply:
 Baseline: simplest profile in H.264; B pictures and CABAC are
not encoded. It is used for low resolutions.
 Main: generally used for SD resolutions.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 165


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 High: generally used for HD resolutions.


For Main and High profiles, also set the following parameters:
- Frame structure: choose from the drop-down list the way
you want to handle interlaced streams. Possible options
are:
- Progressive: the whole frame is encoded. This mode is
suitable for 720p and Web TV.
- Interlace: fields are encoded separately. This mode is
suitable for SD and 1080i.
- Adaptive: the video is encoded in Picture-Adaptive
Frame/Field (PAFF) mode, which means that depending on
the nature of the incoming image, frames or fields are
encoded. This mode is useful when the content in input is
likely to vary. This mode is suitable for SD and 1080i, but
not in a Web TV context.

The adaptive mode uses more CPU than the other modes.
Consequently, you can make less H.264 encodings on a machine in
this mode.

Make sure that the Frame structure parameter respects the


format of the input connected to the H.264 AVC encoder
item.
- P period:
- 1 if the GOP contains no B frame
- 2 if a B frame is present between each P frame
- 3 if two B frames are present between each P frame
- etc.
- Hierarchical GOP: if set to true, B frames can be used as
references.
- Closed GOP period: set to 0 for no periodicity, 1 for every
GOP, 2 for every second GOP, etc.
 Level: select from the drop-down list the level you wish to apply.
 Mode: select an encoding mode:
 Premium: this encoding mode provides the best video quality.
 High-density: this encoding mode provides the best density (it
uses less CPU and thus allows to perform more encodings).
 Display Aspect Ratio: leave to Auto to compute automatically the
display aspect ratio from the input video one and take into account the
video processing you may have added (clipping, for example). If you
want to force the ratio, enter it manually in the editable list (for
instance: 16:9 and 1.33).
 I period: maximum size of the GOP.

166 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Adaptive GOP: if set to false, GOPs always have the same structure. If
set to true, the scene cut detection feature is used and the GOP
structure is modified consequently. Adaptive GOP is always the best
choice regarding video quality, even for Web TV adaptive bitrates.
 Delay: this parameter can have the following values:
 Standard: the decoder delay is set to 1.5 second, and the coder
delay is set to Standard. This mode is a good trade-off between
latency and video quality.
 Short: the decoder delay is set to 1 second, and the coder delay
is set to Short. This mode decreases the latency and the zapping
time.
 Ultra-short: the decoder delay is set to 800 ms, and the coder
delay is set to Ultra-short. This mode gives the lowest latency
and the lowest zapping time, but the video quality is impacted.
 Web TV: the decoder delay is set to 4 seconds, and the coder
delay is set to Standard. This mode can be used for Web TV,
when the latency is not a major concern: it can increase the
video quality.
 Custom: configure manually the decoder delay and the coder
delay (these parameters are not available if the Rate mode is set
to Statmux):
- Decoder delay: this parameter is associated to the decoder
buffer. Increasing this delay improves the quality. However,
the zapping time is longer.
- Coder delay: this parameter can have 3 values:
- Standard: the coder delay is 53 frames. It gives the highest
video quality.
- Short: the coder delay is 39 frames.
- Ultra-short: the coder delay is 25 frames. There is an
impact on video quality.
 Deblocking: enter a value to define the strength of the deblocking filter
that will be applied to the stream. This helps to prevent the blocking
artifacts resulting from image compression. Disabling the deblocking
gives a sharper image, which might be a good choice when the video
bitrate is high.
 Closed caption: set to Insert closed caption if you want closed captions
that are present in the incoming MPEG-2 video stream to be collected
and integrated in output. No processing is applied.
 Psycho-visual enhancement: leave to ON to obtain the best video
quality. Set to OFF to obtain better results with basic PSNR/DMOS
video quality analyzers (however the video quality is lower).

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 167


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Encoding/H.265 HEVC Encoder


The H.265 HEVC encoder item is able to encode H.265 HEVC video in
4:2:0, 8 bits, from low resolution up to UHD.

When the input video is chunked, an IDR frame is set at the beginning
of the chunk. This overrides the configuration parameters.

Figure 3-137. H.265 HEVC encoder parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Bitrate: enter the bit rate value (without encapsulation overhead), in
bits per second.
 Display Aspect Ratio: leave to Auto to compute automatically the
display aspect ratio from the input video one and take into account the
video processing you may have added (clipping, for example). If you
want to force the ratio, enter it manually in the editable list (for
instance: 16:9 and 1.33).
 I period: maximum size of the GOP.
 P period:
- 1 if the GOP contains no B frame
- 2 if a B frame is present between each P frame
- 3 if two B frames are present between each P frame
- etc.
 Hierarchical GOP: if set to true the use of B pictures as a reference is
allowed
 Adaptive GOP: if set to false, GOPs always have the same structure. If
set to true, the scene cut detection feature is used and the GOP
structure is modified consequently. Adaptive GOP is always the best
choice regarding video quality, even for Web TV adaptive bitrates.
 Close GOP Period: GOP period after which the encoder creates a
closed GOP.

168 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Delay: this parameter can have the following values:


 Standard: the decoder delay is set to 1.5 second, and the coder
delay is set to Standard. This mode is a good trade-off between
latency and video quality.
 Short: the decoder delay is set to 1 second, and the coder delay
is set to Short. This mode decreases the latency and the zapping
time.
 Ultra-short: the decoder delay is set to 800 ms, and the coder
delay is set to Ultra-short. This mode gives the lowest latency
and the lowest zapping time, but the video quality is impacted.
 Web TV: the decoder delay is set to 4 seconds, and the coder
delay is set to Standard. This mode can be used for Web TV,
when the latency is not a major concern: it can increase the
video quality.
 Custom: configure manually the decoder delay and the coder
delay:
- Decoder delay: this parameter is associated to the decoder
buffer. Increasing this delay improves the quality. However,
the zapping time is longer.
- Coder delay: this parameter can have 3 values:
- Standard: the coder delay is 53 frames. It gives the highest
video quality.
- Short: the coder delay is 39 frames.
- Ultra-short: the coder delay is 25 frames. There is an
impact on video quality.
 Deblocking: enter a value to define the strength of the deblocking filter
that will be applied to the stream. This helps to prevent the blocking
artifacts resulting from image compression. Disabling the deblocking
gives a sharper image, which might be a good choice when the video
bitrate is high.
 Psycho-visual enhancement: leave to ON to obtain the best video
quality. Set to OFF to obtain better results with basic PSNR/DMOS
video quality analyzers (however the video quality is lower).

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 169


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Encoding/Dolby Digital Encoder


The Dolby Digital Encoder encodes in Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital
Plus.

Figure 3-138. Dolby Digital Encoder parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Dolby Digital Plus: set to true for Dolby Digital Plus or to false for
Dolby Digital. If set to false, also set:
 Room type: type of mixing room that was used for the final
mixing.
 Dolby Surround EX: set to enable to identify the encoded audio
as material encoded in Surround EX. This parameter is only
used if the encoded audio has two Surround channels.
 A/D converter type: enables audio that has passed through a
particular A/D conversion stage to be marked as such, so that a
decoder may apply the complementary D/A process. Choice
between: Standard or HDCD.
 Mixing level: acoustic pressure of the sound during the final
mixing, in decibels.
 Bitrate for Mono: choose from the list the bitrate to use for mono
audio.

170 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Bitrate for Stereo: choose from the list the bitrate to use for stereo
audio.
 Bitrate for 5.1: choose from the list the bitrate to use for 5.1 audio.
 Bitstream mode: choose from the list the type of audio service:
 Complete main: main audio service
 Music and effect: main audio service
 Visually impaired: associated service
 Hearing impaired: associated service
 Dialogue: associated service
 Commentary: associated service
 Emergency: associated service
 Voiceover: associated service
 Karaoke: associated service
 Line mode DRC: information used by Dolby® Digital audio decoders
with line-level outputs, to adjust their output dynamic according to a
profile. Choose from the list the line mode to use for Dynamic Range
Control.
 RF mode DRC: information used by Dolby® Digital audio decoders
with an RF-remodulated output, to adjust their output dynamic
according to a profile. Choose the profile from the list.
 Preferred stereo downmix mode (multi-channel only): choose from
the list if you would rather use Lt/Rt or Lo/Ro downmix in a decoder
with stereo outputs:
 Lt/Rt preferred: Left total/Right total. The Lt/Rt downmix totals
the Surround channels and adds them in-phase to the Left
channel and out-of-phase to the Right channel. This enables a
Dolby Pro Logic decoder to rebuild the L/C/R/S channels for a Pro
Logic home theater.
 Lo/Ro preferred: Left only/Right only. The Lo/Ro downmix
discretely adds the Left and Right Surround channels to the Left
and Right speaker channels, respectively. This preserves stereo
separation for stereo-only monitoring and produces a
monocompatible signal.
The LFE channel is not included in any downmixes.
 Lt/Rt center downmix level (multi-channel only): level shift applied to
the Center channel when adding to the left and right outputs as a
result of downmixing to an Lt/Rt output, in decibels.
 Lt/Rt surround downmix level (multi-channel only): level shift applied
to the Surround channels when downmixing to an Lt/Rt output, in
decibels.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 171


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Lo/Ro center downmix level (multi-channel only): level shift applied to


the Center channel when adding to the left and right outputs as a
result of downmixing to an Lo/Ro output, in decibels.
 Lo/Ro surround downmix level (multi-channel only): level shift applied
to the Surround channels when downmixing to an Lo/Ro output, in
decibels.
 Dolby surround mode (stereo only): indicates whether the stereo
audio is Dolby® Surround encoded or not. The value is not taken into
account in 1/0 mode.
 Dialogue normalisation: average dialog level, in decibels.
 DC highpass filter: set to true to enable the high pass filter on the input
audio samples.
 Copyright bit: set to true if the encoded Dolby Digital bitstream is
copyright protected.
 Original bitstream: set to true if the encoded Dolby Digital bitstream is
the master version or to false if it is a copy.
 LFE channel filter: set to true to enable a 120 Hz filter. The filter is
applied to the LFE channel input of a Dolby Digital encoder prior to
encoding. It is ignored if the LFE channel is disabled. The filter
removes frequencies above 120 Hz that would cause aliasing when
decoded. This filter should only be switched off if the audio to be
encoded is known not to have any signals above 120 Hz.
 Surround 3 dB attenuation: set to true to apply a 3 dB attenuation
before encoding the Surround channel(s).
 Surround phase shift: set to true to apply a 90-degree phase shift to
the Surround channels. The Dolby Digital decoder can therefore easily
create an Lt/Rt downmix.

172 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Workflow Library: Outputs

Output/TS Audio Video Packetizer


The TS Audio Video Packetizer item encapsulates an audio or video
elementary stream into MPEG-2 transport packets. These packets can
then be sent to a TS multiplexer.

Figure 3-139. TS audio video packetizer parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 PCR generation: choose from the list if the PCR generation mode
should be:
 Auto: a PCR is added in a video PID but not in an audio PID.
Choose this mode for TV programs.
 Add on component: allows to add a PCR in an audio PID. Choose
this mode for radio programs.
 Create independent PCR PID: an independent PID for the PCR is
created. Choose this mode for ISDB-Tb programs. In this case,
you must indicate the PID value in the TS multiplexer item, in the
Input tab, in the PCR PID field. See Section ’Output/TS
Multiplexer Output’ on page 174.
 None: no PCR is added.
 AAC encapsulation (useful only for an AAC component): choose
whether the AAC audio should be encapsulated with an ADTS or an
LOAS header. LOAS is mandatory for ISDB-Tb, otherwise ADTS is a
good choice.
 Audio encapsulation mode: choose whether the number of frames per
PES should be variable or fixed. If it is variable, less bandwidth is
used. However, some receivers do not support this feature.
 If the number of frames per PES is fixed, set the Number of
frames per PES.
 If the number of frames per PES is variable, set the Maximum
interval between PES in milliseconds.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 173


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Adaptation for Anevia’s external packager: set to true to generate a


transport stream that can be read and processed by Anevia’s
ViaMotion devices. Do not use this feature if your TS is not sent to this
kind of device. The following adaptations are performed:
 Add of the ES_rate field in all audio an video PES headers.
 The random_access_indicator field is positioned to indicate the
beginning of a chunk.
 Language: leave to Auto to keep the language of the input, or use the
ISO codes1 to force the language manually (for instance, enter eng for
English, spa for Spanish, etc.).
 Encoder Boundary Point: Select the standard to apply if you want to
add adaptive streaming specific signaling information. The generated
stream will be pre-conditionned integrating fragments and segment
boundaries information.

Output/TS Multiplexer Output


The TS Multiplexer item multiplexes transport packets in an MPEG-2 TS.

Figure 3-140. TS multiplexer parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 TS bitrate: set the TS rate in bits per second.
 TS ID
 PAT period: enter the period of the PAT, in milliseconds.
 PMT period: enter the period of all the PMT, in milliseconds.
 Standard: set the standard that the output TS should respect (DVB,
MPEG-2 or ATSC).

In the Input tab, additional parameters are available:


 Input type: choose between:
 Program: defines a program, a component of this program. In
this case, set the following parameters:

1.For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-


ter=%25

174 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

- PMT PID
- PCR PID: the Auto value is suitable in 99% of cases. Specify
the PID if you asked to create an independent PCR PID in the
TS audio video packetizer item, in the PCR generation field
(see Section ’Output/TS Audio Video Packetizer’ on
page 173).
 Component: defines a component of a program that has already
been defined.
For example: define a program input for the video component
and a component input for the associated audio component.
 Ghost: defines a component that is not referenced in a program.
In the PID field, leave to Auto if you want the ghost to keep the
same PID value as in input, or set to Add an offset if you wish to
add an offset to the input PID (e.g. if the input PID is 100 and you
want to have an output PID of 300, set the offset to 200).
 Program number: program number of the component.
 Component PID

Output/TS over IP Streamer Output


The TS over IP Streamer output item streams an MPEG-2 TS over
UDP/IP or over RTP/UDP/IP in CBR mode (i.e. with stuffing packets) or in
VBR mode (i.e. without stuffing packets). Both multicast and unicast are
supported.

Figure 3-141. TS over IP streamer output parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Protocol: the protocol can be:
 TS/UDP/IP: the MPEG-2 TS packets are directly in the UDP
payload.
 TS/RTP/UDP/IP: the MPEG-2 TS packets are in the RTP payload.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 175


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 IP address: to set the IP address, click in the field. In the displayed


dialog, define if the address is multicast and if so, set the LAN. Enter
the IP address in the field. If it is a unicast address, it must be
reachable, otherwise job creation will be refused. To check that the
address is reachable, ViBE VS7000 uses its IP configuration (LAN,
default gateways, IP routes).
 UDP port
 Source IP address: can be used to force the source IP address, if
needed.
 VBR TS (no stuffing packets): set to true if you do not want stuffing
packets to be added in the output stream.
 TTL: Time-to-live field of the IP headers. This is the maximum number
of IP routers that a stream is allowed to cross.
 MTU: Maximum Transmission Unit. This is the maximum size of a
datagram that can be streamed on the network without being
fragmented. Default value is Ethernet one (1500). This MTU also
defines the number of MPEG-2 TS packets by IP datagram. By default
this number is set to 7, but if you modify the MTU parameter, the
number of MPEG-2 TS packets by IP datagram will be the highest
allowed by the MTU.

Output/MPTS over IP Output


The MPTS over IP output creates an MPTS and streams it over UDP/IP or
over RTP/UDP/IP.

To create an MPTS, the following method is recommended:


 Create one job per program.
 Use for each job an MPTS over IP output. All the jobs sharing a same
MPTS name thus share the same MPTS.
 A job named MPTS name is automatically created. To improve the
whole robustness of the operation, each program as well as the
multiplexing are processed in separate jobs.

This method, on top of improving the robustness, also eases operations,


as each program can be controlled separately. To start (or stop) a
program, you just have to start (or stop) the corresponding job.

The MPTS over IP output is equivalent to a TS multiplexer item and one


TS over IP streamer item (or two if a backup output is defined).

176 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Figure 3-142. MPTS over IP output parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Protocol: the protocol can be:
 TS/UDP/IP: the MPEG-2 TS packets are directly in the UDP
payload.
 TS/RTP/UDP/IP: the MPEG-2 TS packets are in the RTP payload.
 MPTS name: name of the MPTS, that will be used as reference in the
jobs that will constitute the MPTS.
 TS bitrate: set the TS rate in bits per second.
 Statmux pool global bitrate: define the bitrate value that will be
allocated for statistical encoding. Only the video components
controlled by the statmux will use this bitrate. This bitrate must be
under the TS total bitrate so as to keep bandwidth for non-statmuxed
components (audio, video CBR, signalization, pass-through
components).
If you wish to create a simple MPTS without using the statmux
feature, leave this parameter to unused.
 TS ID
 Standard: set the standard that the output TS should respect (DVB,
MPEG-2 or ATSC).
 PAT period: enter the period of the PAT, in milliseconds.
 PMT period: enter the period of all the PMT, in milliseconds.
 Define backup output: set to true if you wish to use a backup output
and define its characteristics.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 177


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 IP address: to set the IP address, click in the field. In the displayed


dialog, define if the address is multicast and if so, set the LAN. Enter
the IP address in the field. If it is a unicast address, it must be
reachable, otherwise job creation will be refused. To check that the
address is reachable, ViBE VS7000 uses its IP configuration (LAN,
default gateways, IP routes).
 UDP port
 Source IP address: can be used to force the source IP address, if
needed.
 TTL: Time-to-live field of the IP headers. This is the maximum number
of IP routers that a stream is allowed to cross.
 MTU: Maximum Transmission Unit. This is the maximum size of a
datagram that can be streamed on the network without being
fragmented. Default value is Ethernet one (1500). This MTU also
defines the number of MPEG-2 TS packets by IP datagram. By default
this number is set to 7, but if you modify the MTU parameter, the
number of MPEG-2 TS packets by IP datagram will be the highest
allowed by the MTU.

Input Tab

Figure 3-143. MPTS over IP output parameters – Input tab

In the Input tab, set the following parameter:


 Input type: choose between:
 Program: defines a program, a component of this program. In
this case, set the following parameters:
- PMT PID

178 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

- PCR PID: the Auto value is suitable in 99% of cases. Specify


the PID if you asked to create an independent PCR PID in the
TS audio video packetizer item, in the PCR generation field
(see Section ’Output/TS Audio Video Packetizer’ on
page 173).
 Component: defines a component of a program that has already
been defined.
For example: define a program input for the video component
and a component input for the associated audio component.
 Ghost: defines a component that is not referenced in a program.
In the PID field, leave to Auto if you want the ghost to keep the
same PID value as in input, or set to Add an offset if you wish to
add an offset to the input PID (e.g. if the input PID is 100 and you
want to have an output PID of 300, set the offset to 200).
 Program number: program number of the component.
 Component PID
 Controlled by statmux: set to true if the component shall be driven by
the statistical multiplexing mechanism, and also set the displayed
parameters.
The table below lists the bitrate values that are used according
to your video resolution.

Table 3-10. Recommended values for minimum and maximum bitrates when
statmux is used

Minimum bitrate Maximum bitrate


Video resolution
(kbps) (kbps)

HD1080i50/60 1000 12000

HD720p50/60 800 8000

SD 300 6000

It is not possible to use values outside of the bitrate range, and


it is not recommended to reduce the bitrate range.

If you set the minimum bitrate to a lower valuer than the minimum
value of the range, the value applied is the minimum value on the
range, and inversely for the maximum bitrate.

 Minimum bitrate (TS overhead included): indicate the minimum


bitrate that the video component should have.
 Maximum bitrate (TS overhead included): indicate the
maximum bitrate that the video component should have.
 Quality: set the picture quality level required, in percentage. The
value must be between 30 and 90% (best quality). Default value:
70%.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 179


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 PMT PID
 PCR PID: the Auto value is suitable in 99% of cases. Specify the PID if
you asked to create an independent PCR PID in the TS audio video
packetizer item, in the PCR generation field (see Section ’Output/TS
Audio Video Packetizer’ on page 173).

Output/TS File Output


The TS file output records the output of a TS multiplexer into a file.

Figure 3-144. TS file output parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 TS file network storage (mounting point): indicate the network storage
where the output TS file must be placed.
 TS file folder: indicate the folder on the network storage where the
output TS file must be placed.
 TS file name: specify the name of the output TS file.
 TS file name extension: specify the file extension that the output TS
file should have.
If this parameter is not filled, the TS file name will be kept "as is".
If this parameter is filled, any extension of the TS file name parameter
will be replaced by this extension. This is useful when you want to
keep the input file name (hot folder application, for example) and
replace only the extension: you link the TS file name to the input TS
file name, and you force the extension using the TS file name
extension.

Output/RTMP Output
The RTMP output sends audio/video to a Flash Media Server (FMS) using
RTMP push (to TCP port 1935 of the FMS).

Adaptive bitrate is supported (a single chunker shall be defined for all the
video components).

180 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Figure 3-145. RTMP output parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Flash media server URL: indicate the LAN used to communicate with
the Flash Media Server (FMS). If the FMS URL contains a name instead
of an IP address, you must configure the DNS in the Setup tab, IP
category (see Section ’DNS’ on page 75).
If you do not wish to use the IP address resolution by DNS, you can
also directly enter the IP address of the FMS in the Flash media server
IP address field.
 Authentication type: choose:
 None or in FMS URL: if there is no authentication or it is
indicated in the URL of the flash media server.
 Akamai: if the authentication is managed by an Akamai server.
In this case, indicate the User name and Password to use.
 Level3: if the authentication is managed by a Level3 server. In
this case, indicate the User name and Password to use.

In the Input tab, you can also set the following parameter:
 Stream name: this parameter must be identical to all the components
of a stream. When present, an audio component should be present on
all the streams of an output.

Output/HLS Output
The HLS output receives audio/video components, creates the chunks
and the manifests, encrypts the chunks, makes them available on the
local Web server.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 181


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Parameters Tab

Figure 3-146. HLS output parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Manifest file name: name of the main manifest.
 Custom naming: this parameter lets you define how to name the
chunk files.

182 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 If set to false, the name of the chunk files will be built as follows:
manifest name_time_stream ID_sequence number
manifest name being the name set earlier in the Manifest file
name field without the m3u8 file extension.
Define the Add prefix parameter: set to true to use the name of
the manifest as a prefix for all file names (chunks and secondary
manifests). This is useful to differentiate the files originating
from several streams.
 If set to true, the name of the chunk files will be built according
to the following rule:
field1_field2_field3_field4_field5
Set the following parameters:
- Name: enter a name for the file, at your convenience.
- Separator: choose from the list the sign that should be used
as separator in the filename: _ or -.
- Field 1 to Field 5: choose from the lists the elements you
want to use to build the filename, among: name, bitrate,
stream ID, sequence number, time and unused. If set to
unused, this field and the following ones will not be
included in the filename.
time being the date of the beginning of the session (and not the
date of the chunk).
sequence number being incremented at each chunk.
 HLS Protocol version: choose one version:
 Version 2: suitable for programs with only one audio language.
The generated chunks contain both video and audio
components.
 Version 4: mandatory for programs with more than one audio
language. Video and audio components are not in the same
chunks (only one component per chunk). This version may be
not supported by old devices.
 Version 5: lets you have subtitles in WebVTT format.
 Add low bitrate audio only stream: if set to true, chunks that contain
only the audio component are generated.
 Available stream duration: depth of chunks that are available on the
Web server.
 Activate directory rollover: if set to true, sub-directories named
Rollover_X are created. Each directory contains a Segments number
per directory corresponding to the fixed duration. The sub-directories
and the chuncks are deleted after the available stream duration set
above, if stored in the local web server.
 Stream available on local web server: if set to true, the stream is
available on the VS7000 internal Web server. In this case, set the
following parameters:

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 183


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Local Web server IP address: virtual IP address. A player can


receive the chunks from this address. This address must be part
of a ViBE VS7000 LAN, otherwise job creation will be refused.
 Folder: folder where the manifests and chunks are stored on the
local Web server.
 Max clients number: expected maximum number of clients for
this output stream. This parameter is used to check that the
device has the resources to process the requests for this stream.
 Push stream on remote web server: if set to true, the stream is pushed
to a remote Web server. In this case, set the following parameters:
 Remote web server URL: indicate the LAN used to communicate
with the remote Web server. If the remote Web server URL
contains a name instead of an IP address, you must configure
the DNS in the Setup tab, IP category (see Section ’DNS’ on
page 75).
If you do not wish to use the IP address resolution by DNS, you
can also directly enter the IP address of the remote Web server
in the Remote web server IP address field.
 Local storage duration when remote server is unreachable:
enter the time during which the content should be bufferized if
during a push action, the remote server becomes unreachable.
When the remote server is available again, all the content is sent
at once.

Before using this feature, check that the bandwidth is widely


dimensioned, because otherwise there is a risk of network
congestion when the remote server is back up, which can impact
other streams.

 Delete files from remote web server: if set to true, the files
posted on the remote Web server are deleted after the Available
stream duration set above.
 Remote web server authentication: if the remote Web server
requires an authentication select its HTTP type, Basic or Digest,
and enter the User name and Password.
 Define backup remote Web server: if set to true, the stream is
also sent to a backup remote Web server for redundancy
purposes. Indicate the URL and the IP address of the backup
server in the dedicated fields, as well as the authentication
parameters, if needed.
 Encrypt files: if set to true, DRM is activated. Set the following
parameters:
 Key server connection: select the conditional access server to
which ViBE VS7000 should connect to get the key from the
drop-down list. If set to None, ViBE VS7000 generates the key
itself. Otherwise, enter the specific parameters of the CAS
server:

184 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

- Content id (Nagra, Irdeto, PolyMedia): identifier of the


program to encrypt (string).
- Resource id (Verimatrix): identifier of the program to
encrypt (integer).
- Account Id (Irdeto): identifier of the account to connect to
the Irdeto server.
- Use last key (Irdeto, Viaccess): Set to true to return the last
registered encryption key for a specified live event. Use this
method if an encoding session reuses the last generated
encryption key for the live event instead of generating a
new key. This is particularly useful when multiple encoders
are configured, to use the same encryption key for a live
event.
Set to false to generate and return a new PlayReady
encryption key for the specified live event.
- Key server URL: URL of the CAS server. DNS is not
supported for this URL, so the IP address shall be explicitly
contained by the URL.
- Define backup key server: set to true if you want to declare
a backup CAS server. Enter the URL of this backup server in
the Backup key server URL field.
- Use authentication (Nagra, Verimatrix): set to true if the
CAS server requires an authentication, and enter the User
name and Password. Also specify the HTTP Authentication
type (auto, basic or digest).
- Irdeto PlayReady protected HLS version: indicate the
version supported by the Irdeto player.
- None
Encryption mode: set to Playready Cisco if you want to
encrypt the output with playready license compatible with
CISCO/ NDS player, set to AES - 128 in the other cases.
If set to Playready Cisco set the following parameters:
- Key seed and Key id: enter the values of the key seed (32
characters) and the key identifier. These keys must be the
ones registered on the license server.
- License URL: enter the URL of the license server to which
the player must connect to retrieve the encryption keys.
 Key mode:
- If set to Fixed Key, the key is fixed once. Enter the value of
the key in the Key field (32 characters).
- If set to Key Rotation, the key is periodically renewed. Enter
the refresh period in the Key refresh period field, in number
of chunks.
 IV value: value of the initial vector. This can be:
- Chunk number

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 185


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

- Random value: in this case, enter the refresh period of the


initial vector in the IV refresh period field, in number of
chunks.

Input Tab

In the Input tab, set the following parameter:


 Language: leave to Auto to keep the language of the input, or use the
ISO codes1 to force the language manually (for instance, enter eng for
English, spa for Spanish, etc.).

Input: TS Subtitle Tab

You may:
 Get the DVB Teletext subtitles from a TS input and include them in
WebVTT format in the HLS output.
 Get the DVB Subtitles from a TS input and include them in SMPTE-TT
format in the HLS output.

To do so, you must:


 Create a TS component extractor item to extract the subtitles.
 In this item, indicate the PID of the Teletext or DVB Subtitle packets.
 Link the TS component extractor item to a TS Subtitle input of the HLS
output.

Note that if you want to extract several IDs coming from the same input
PID, you must link the two concerned items as many times as of IDs.

For each linked TS subtitle input, an Input: TS Subtitle tab is created in


the HLS output item.

Figure 3-147. HLS output – TS subtitle parameters

1.For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-


ter=%25

186 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

In this tab, you must set the following parameters:


 Subtitle input ID: indicate the page number you wish to use. If left to
Auto, the first page number of the subtitle is used. This mode is not
suitable when there are several Subtitle IDs in the same input PID.
 Subtitle language: if left to Auto, which is fine if the stream complies
with the standard, the VS7000 uses the language associated with the
teletext indicated by the ID. Otherwise, specify the language manually
using the ISO codes1 (e.g., enter eng for English, spa for Spanish, etc.).

Input: ES Subtitle Tab

The ES Subtitle tab lets you get subtitles from an SDI input and to include
them in WebVTT format in an HLS output.

To do so, you must link the Teletext output of an SDI input item to the ES
subtitle input of the HLS output.

For each linked ES subtitle input, an Input: ES Subtitle tab is created in


the HLS output item.

Figure 3-148. HLS output – ES subtitle parameters

In this tab, you must set the following parameters:


 ES Subtitle input ID: indicate the page number you wish to use. If left
to Auto, the first page number of the subtitle is used. This mode is not
suitable when there are several Subtitle IDs in the same input.
 ES Subtitle language: if left to Auto, which is fine if the stream
complies with the standard, the VS7000 uses the language associated
with the teletext indicated by the ID. Otherwise, specify the language
manually using the ISO codes2 (e.g., enter eng for English, spa for
Spanish, etc.).

Output/HLS File Output


The HLS File output receives audio/video components, creates the
chunks and manifests, encrypts the chunks and makes them available on
a network storage.

1. For
the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-
ter=%25
2. For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-

ter=%25

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 187


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Parameters Tab

Figure 3-149. HLS file output parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 HLS files network storage (mounting point): indicate the network
storage where the output files must be placed.
 HLS files folder: indicate the path to the folder on the network storage
where the output file must be placed.
 Manifest file name: name of the main manifest.
 HLS Protocol version: choose one version:
 Version 2: suitable for programs with only one audio language.
The generated chunks contain both video and audio
components.
 Version 4: mandatory for programs with more than one audio
language. Video and audio components are not in the same
chunks (only one component per chunk). This version may not
be supported by old devices.

188 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Version 5: lets you have subtitles in WebVTT format.


 Add low bitrate audio only stream: if set to true, chunks that contain
only the audio component are generated.
 Encrypt files: if set to true, DRM is activated. Set the following
parameters:
 Key mode:
- If set to Fixed Key, the key is fixed once. Enter the value of
the key in the Key field (32 characters).
- If set to Key Rotation, the key is periodically renewed. Enter
the refresh period in the Key refresh period field, in number
of chunks.
 IV value: value of the initial vector. This can be:
- Chunk number
- Random value: in this case, enter the refresh period of the
initial vector in the IV refresh period field, in number of
chunks.
 Key server connection: select the conditional access server to
which ViBE VS7000 should connect to get the key from the
drop-down list. If set to None, ViBE VS7000 generates the key
itself. Otherwise, enter the specific parameters of the CAS
server:
- Content id (Nagra, Irdeto, PolyMedia): identifier of the
program to encrypt (string).
- Resource id (Verimatrix): identifier of the program to
encrypt (integer).
- Account Id (Irdeto): identifier of the account to connect to
the Irdeto server.
- Use last key (Irdeto): Set to true to return the last registered
encryption key for a specified live event. Use this method if
an encoding session reuses the last generated encryption
key for the live event instead of generating a new key. This
is particularly useful when multiple encoders are
configured, to use the same encryption key for a live event.
Set to false to generate and return a new PlayReady
encryption key for the specified live event.
- Key server URL: URL of the CAS server.
- Define backup key server: set to true if you want to declare
a backup CAS server. Enter the URL of this backup server in
the Backup key server URL field.
- Use authentication (Nagra, Verimatrix): set to true if the
CAS server requires an authentication, and enter the User
name and Password. Also specify the HTTP Authentication
type (auto, basic or digest).

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 189


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Custom naming: this parameter lets you define how to name the
chunk files.
 If set to false, the name of the chunk files will be built as follows:
manifest name_time_stream ID_sequence number
manifest name being the name set earlier in the Manifest file
name field without the m3u8 file extension.
Define the Add prefix parameter: set to true to use the name of
the manifest as a prefix for all file names (chunks and secondary
manifests). This is useful to differentiate the files originating
from several streams.
 If set to true, the name of the chunk files will be built according
to the following rule:
field1_field2_field3_field4_field5
Set the following parameters:
- Name: enter a name for the file, at your convenience.
- Separator: choose from the list the sign that should be used
as separator in the filename: _ or -.
- Field 1 to Field 5: choose from the lists the elements you
want to use to build the filename, among: name, bitrate,
stream ID, sequence number, time and unused. If set to
unused, this field and the following ones will not be
included in the filename.
time being the date of the beginning of the session (and not the
date of the chunk).
sequence number being incremented at each chunk.

Input Tab

In the Input tab, set the following parameter:


 Language: leave to Auto to keep the language of the input, or use the
ISO codes1 to force the language manually (for instance, enter eng for
English, spa for Spanish, etc.).

Input: TS Subtitle Tab

As for a live HLS output, you can get the DVB Teletext subtitles or DVB
subtitles from an input and include them as WebVTT subtitles or SMPTE
TT in an HLS File output. The process and parameters are exactly the
same as in live. Refer to Section ’Input: TS Subtitle Tab’ on page 186.

Output/Smooth Streaming
The Smooth Streaming output receives audio/video components,
creates the chunks and the manifest, encrypts the chunks, makes them
available on the local Web server and/or on a remote Web server.

1.For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-


ter=%25

190 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Parameters Tab

Figure 3-150. Smooth streaming parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Use local Web server: if set to true, the chunks are available on the
device’s Web server. In this case, set the following parameters:
 Local Web server IP address: virtual IP address. A player can
receive the chunks from this address. This address must be part
of a ViBE VS7000 LAN, otherwise job creation will be refused.
 Folder: folder where the manifests and chunks are stored on the
local Web server.
 Max clients number: expected maximum number of clients for
this output stream. This parameter is used to check that the
device has the resources to process the requests for this stream.
 Available stream duration: depth of chunks that are available on the
Web server.
 Push on remote Web server: if set to true, the manifest and chunks are
posted to a remote Web server, an IIS server for example. In this case,
set the following parameters:
 Remote Web server URL: indicate the LAN used to communicate
with the remote Web server. If the remote Web server URL
contains a name instead of an IP address, you must configure
the DNS in the Setup tab, IP category (see Section ’DNS’ on
page 75).
If you do not wish to use the IP address resolution by DNS, you
can also directly enter the IP address of the remote Web server
in the Remote Web server IP address field.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 191


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Authentication type: set to true if the remote Web server


requires an authentication, and enter the User name and
Password.
 Encrypt files: if set to true, DRM is activated. Set the following
parameters:
 Algorithm: two algorithms are available:
- AES CBC
- AES CTR
 Key server connection: select the conditional access server to
which ViBE VS7000 should connect to get the key from the
drop-down list. If set to None, ViBE VS7000 generates the key
itself. Otherwise, enter the specific parameters of the CAS
server:
- Key server URL: URL of the CAS server.
- Use authentication (BuyDrm): set to true if the CAS server
requires an authentication, and enter the User name and
Password. Also specify the HTTP Key server authentication
type (auto, basic or digest).
- Key server user name (Irdeto): enter the user name required
to access the Irdeto key server.
- Key server password (Irdeto): enter the password required
to access the Irdeto key server.
- Server key, User key, Key Id and Media Id (BuyDrm): enter
the values provided by BuyDrm.
- Account Id (Irdeto): identifier of the account to connect to
the Irdeto server.
- Content id: identifier of the program to encrypt (string).
- Use last key (Irdeto, Viaccess): Set to true to return the last
registered encryption key for a specified live event. Use this
method if an encoding session reuses the last generated
encryption key for the live event instead of generating a
new key. This is particularly useful when multiple encoders
are configured, to use the same encryption key for a live
event.
Set to false to generate and return a new PlayReady
encryption key for the specified live event.
- Define backup key server: set to true if you want to declare
a backup CAS server. Enter the URL of this backup server in
the Backup key server URL field.
 Key and Key id: enter the values of the key seed (32 characters)
and the key identifier. These keys must be the ones registered
on the license server.
 License URL: enter the URL of the license server to which the
player must connect to retrieve the encryption keys.

192 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Connection to remote server: select One single connection for


all profiles or One connection per profile depending on the
remote web server requirements.

Upon an important configuration change, it is necessary to restart


the IIS server. For instance, when adding a new video profile, the
VS7000 stops and restarts the IIS server. However, for this restart
action to be possible, the IIS server configuration must authorize it.
To do so, the IIS server administrator must add the following line to
the isml file:
<meta name="restartOnEncoderReconnect"
content="True" />
Without this line being present, the administrator will need to restart
manually the IIS server publishing point.

Input Tab

In the Input tab, set the following parameter:


 Language: leave to Auto to keep the language of the input, or use the
ISO codes1 to force the language manually (for instance, enter eng for
English, spa for Spanish, etc.).

Input: TS Subtitle Tab

You may:
 Get the DVB Teletext subtitles from a TS input and include them in
DFXP format in the Smooth Streaming output.
 Get the DVB Subtitles from a TS input and include them in SMPTE-TT
format in the Smooth Streaming output.

To do so, you must:


 Create a TS component extractor item to extract the subtitles.
 In this item, indicate the PID of the DVB Teletext or DVB Subtitle
packets.
 Link the TS component extractor item to a TS Subtitle input of the
Smooth Streaming output.

Note that if you want to extract several IDs coming from the same input
PID, you must link the two concerned items as many times as of IDs.

For each linked TS subtitle input, an Input: TS Subtitle tab is created in


the Smooth Streaming output item.

1. For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-

ter=%25

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 193


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Figure 3-151. Smooth streaming output – TS subtitle parameters

In this tab, you must set the following parameters:


 Subtitle input ID: indicate the page number you wish to use. If left to
Auto, the first page number of the subtitle is used. This mode is not
suitable when there are several Subtitle IDs in the same input PID.
 Subtitle language: if left to Auto, which is fine if the stream complies
with the standard, the VS7000 uses the language associated with the
teletext indicated by the ID. Otherwise, specify the language manually
using the ISO codes1 (e.g., enter eng for English, spa for Spanish, etc.).

Input: ES Subtitle Tab

The ES Subtitle tab lets you get subtitles from an SDI input and to include
them in DFXP format in a Smooth Streaming output.

To do so, you must link the Teletext output of an SDI input item to the ES
subtitle input of the Smooth Streaming output.

For each linked ES subtitle input, an Input: ES Subtitle tab is created in


the Smooth Streaming output item.

Figure 3-152. Smooth streaming output – ES subtitle parameters

1.For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-


ter=%25

194 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

In this tab, you must set the following parameters:


 ES Subtitle input ID: indicate the page number you wish to use. If left
to Auto, the first page number of the subtitle is used. This mode is not
suitable when there are several Subtitle IDs in the same input.
 ES Subtitle language: if left to Auto, which is fine if the stream
complies with the standard, the VS7000 uses the language associated
with the teletext indicated by the ID. Otherwise, specify the language
manually using the ISO codes1 (e.g., enter eng for English, spa for
Spanish, etc.).

Output/Smooth Streaming File Output


The Smooth Streaming file output receives audio/video components,
creates chunks and manifests, encrypts the chunks and makes them
available on network storage.

Parameters Tab

Figure 3-153. Smooth Streaming file output parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Smooth Streaming files network storage (mounting point): indicate
the network storage where the output files must be placed.
 Smooth Streaming files folder: indicate the path to the folder on the
network storage where the output file must be placed.
1. For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-

ter=%25

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 195


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Smooth Streaming file format: choose whether the output file should
be in disk file format or in wire file format.
 Output file prefix: prefix added to the output file name.
 Encrypt files: if set to true, DRM is activated. Set the following
parameters:
 Algorithm: two algorithms are available:
- AES CBC
- AES CTR
 Key server connection: select the conditional access server to
which ViBE VS7000 should connect to get the key from the
drop-down list. If set to None, ViBE VS7000 generates the key
itself. Otherwise, enter the specific parameters of the CAS
server:
- Key server URL: URL of the CAS server.
- Use authentication (BuyDrm): set to true if the CAS server
requires an authentication, and enter the User name and
Password. Also specify the HTTP Key server authentication
type (auto, basic or digest).
- Key server user name (Irdeto): enter the user name required
to access the Irdeto key server.
- Key server password (Irdeto): enter the password required
to access the Irdeto key server.
- Server key, User key, Key Id and Media Id (BuyDrm): enter
the values provided by BuyDrm.
- Account Id (Irdeto): identifier of the account to connect to
the Irdeto server.
- Content id: identifier of the program to encrypt (string).
- Use last key (Irdeto): Set to true to return the last registered
encryption key for a specified live event. Use this method if
an encoding session reuses the last generated encryption
key for the live event instead of generating a new key. This
is particularly useful when multiple encoders are
configured, to use the same encryption key for a live event.
Set to false to generate and return a new PlayReady
encryption key for the specified live event.
- Define backup key server: set to true if you want to declare
a backup CAS server. Enter the URL of this backup server in
the Backup key server URL field.
 Key and Key id: enter the values of the key seed (32 characters)
and the key identifier. These keys must be the ones registered
on the license server.
 License URL: enter the URL of the license server to which the
player must connect to retrieve the encryption keys.

196 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Input Tab

In the Input tab, set the following parameter:


 Language: leave to Auto to keep the language of the input, or use the
ISO codes1 to force the language manually (for instance, enter eng for
English, spa for Spanish, etc.).

Input: TS Subtitle Tab

As for a live Smooth Streaming output, you can get the DVB Teletext or
DVB-Subtitle subtitles from an input and include them in a Smooth
Streaming File output. The process and parameters are exactly the same
as in live. Refer to Section ’Input: TS Subtitle Tab’ on page 193.

Output/MPEG-DASH
The MPEG-DASH output receives audio/video components, creates the
chunks and manifests and makes them available on the local Web server
and/or on a remote Web server.

Parameters Tab

Figure 3-154. MPEG-DASH output parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 Available stream duration: depth of chunks that are available on the
Web server.
 Output file prefix: prefix added to the output file name.
 HbbTV compliant: set to true to generate an HbbTV compliant stream.
Chunks are then compatible with MPEG-DASH and HbbTV. Manifests
for MPEG-DASH and HbbTV are generated.

1. For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-

ter=%25

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 197


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Use local Web server: if set to true, the chunks are available on the
device’s Web server. In this case, set the following parameters:
 Local Web server IP address: virtual IP address. A player can
receive the chunks from this address. This address must be part
of a ViBE VS7000 LAN, otherwise job creation will be refused.
 Folder: folder where the manifests and chunks are stored on the
local Web server.
 Max clients number: expected maximum number of clients for
this output stream. This parameter is used to check that the
device has the resources to process the requests for this stream.
 Push on remote Web server: if set to true, the manifest and chunks are
posted to a remote Web server. In this case, set the following
parameters:
 Remote Web server URL: indicate the URL used to communicate
with the remote Web server. If the remote Web server URL
contains a name instead of an IP address, you must configure
the DNS in the Setup tab, IP category (see Section ’DNS’ on
page 75).
If you do not wish to use the IP address resolution by DNS, you
can also directly enter the IP address of the remote Web server
or enter the number of the LAN to connect to the remote server
in the LAN to remote Web server or Remote Web server IP
address field.
 Authentication: set to true if the remote Web server requires an
authentication, and enter the User name and Password.
 Delete files from remote web server: if set to true, the files posted on
the remote Web server are deleted after the Available stream duration
set above.
 Local storage duration when remote server is unreachable: enter the
time during which the content should be bufferized if during a push
action, the remote server becomes unreachable. When the remote
server is available again, all the content is sent at once.

Before using this feature, check that the bandwidth is widely


dimensioned, because otherwise there is a risk of network
congestion when the remote server is back up, which can impact
other streams.

 Encrypt files: if set to true, DRM is activated.


 Key and Key id: enter the values of the key seed (32 characters)
and the key identifier. These keys must be the ones registered
on the license server.
 License URL: enter the URL of the license server to which the
player must connect to retrieve the encryption keys.
 Interleaving: if set to true, video and audio are in the same files. This
parameter SHALL be set to false if there is more than one audio
components.

198 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Input Tab

In the Input tab, set the following parameter:


 Language: leave to Auto to keep the language of the input, or use the
ISO codes1 to force the language manually (for instance, enter eng for
English, spa for Spanish, etc.).

Input: TS Subtitle Tab

To get the DVB Teletext or DVB-Subtitle subtitles from a TS input and


include them as SMPTE-TT subtitles in a DASH output, you must:
 Create a TS component extractor item to extract the subtitles.
 In this item, indicate the PID of the DVB Teletext or DVB-Subtitles
packets.
 Link the TS component extractor item to a TS Subtitle input of the
DASH output.

Note that if you want to extract several IDs coming from the same input
PID, you must link the two concerned items as many times as of IDs.

For each linked TS subtitle input, an Input: TS Subtitle tab is created in


the DASH output item.

Figure 3-155. DASH output – TS subtitle parameters

In this tab, you must set the following parameters:


 Subtitle input ID: indicate the page number you wish to use. If left to
Auto, the first page number of the subtitle is used. This mode is not
suitable when there are several Subtitle IDs in the same input PID.
 Subtitle language: if left to Auto, which is fine if the stream complies
with the standard, the VS7000 uses the language associated with the
teletext indicated by the ID. Otherwise, specify the language manually
using the ISO codes2 (e.g., enter eng for English, spa for Spanish, etc.).

1. For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-

ter=%25

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 199


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Output/MPEG-DASH File Output


The MPEG-DASH file output receives audio/video components, creates
chunks and manifests and makes them available on network storage.

Parameters Tab

Figure 3-156. MPEG-DASH file output parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 MPEG-DASH files network storage (mounting point): indicate the
network storage where the output files must be placed.
 MPEG-DASH files folder: indicate the folder on the network storage
where the output files must be placed.
 MPEG-DASH files format: choose one of the available formats:
 Disk file format: in this format, all chunks are grouped into a
single MP4 file (moof).
 Wire file format: in this format, all chunks are delivered in
distinct files. This format is compatible with all types of Web
servers.
 Encrypt files: if set to true, DRM is activated.
 Key and Key id: enter the values of the key seed (32 characters)
and the key identifier. These keys must be the ones registered
on the license server.
 License URL: enter the URL of the license server to which the
player must connect to retrieve the encryption keys.
 HbbTV compliant: set to true to generate an HbbTV compliant stream.
Chunks are then compatible with MPEG-DASH and HbbTV. Manifests
for MPEG-DASH and HbbTV are generated.
 Output file prefix: indicate the prefix of the output file.

Input Tab

In the Input tab, set the following parameter:


2.For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-
ter=%25

200 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Language: leave to Auto to keep the language of the input, or use the
ISO codes1 to force the language manually (e.g., enter eng for English,
spa for Spanish, etc.).

Input: TS Subtitle Tab

As for a live DASH output, you can get the DVB Teletext or DVB-Subtitle
subtitles from a TS input and include them as SMPTE-TT subtitles in a
DASH output. The process and parameters are exactly the same as in
live. Refer to Section ’Input: TS Subtitle Tab’ on page 199.

Output/MP4 File Output


The MP4 file output supports the following tracks:
 Video: H.264, MPEG-2
 Audio: AAC, Dolby Digital, MPEG-1 layer 2

RTP hints tracks are automatically included in MP4 files.

Parameters Tab

Figure 3-157. MP4 file output parameters

For this item, you must set the following parameters:


 MP4 file network storage (mounting point): indicate the network
storage where the output file must be placed.
 MP4 file folder: indicate the folder on the network storage where the
output file must be placed.
 MP4 file name: enter the name of the MP4 file.
 MP4 file name extension: specify the file extension that the output
MP4 file should have.
If this parameter is not filled, the MP4 file name will be kept "as is".
If this parameter is filled, any extension of the MP4 file name
parameter will be replaced by this extension. This is useful when you
want to keep the input file name (hot folder application, for example)
and replace only the extension: you link the MP4 file name to the input
file name, and you force the extension using the MP4 file name
extension.

1. For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-

ter=%25

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 201


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Input Tab

For each component added in the output stream, a new Input tab is
created.

Figure 3-158. MP4 file output – Input tab parameters

The Input tab contains the following parameters:


 Track ID: the value set for the parameter must be unique. Leave it to
Auto to ensure its uniqueness.
 Language: leave to Auto to keep the language of the input, or use the
ISO codes1 to force the language manually (e.g., enter eng for English,
spa for Spanish, etc.).

Workflow Library: Favorites


Favorite workflows are workflows consisting of basic workflows.
Workflows of this library are offered preferentially when creating a job.
You can add your own workflows in this category for a direct access
when you create a job.

Favorites/Live SD-HD Encoder Item


This workflow encodes an SDI input into a TS over IP output.
 Video is encoded into H.264, HEVC or MPEG-2.
 Audio PCM is encoded into AAC, Dolby Digital or MPEG-1 Layer 2.
 Dolby input is transcoded into AAC, Dolby Digital, MPEG-1 Layer 2 or
pass-through.

Favorites/Live SD-HD Transcoder Item


This workflow allows generating a TS over IP output for a service from a
SDI input.
 Supported outputs: SPTS, MPTS, PIP generation.

1.For the whole list of ISO codes, refer to: http://www.sil.org/iso639-3/codes.asp?order=639_2&let-


ter=%25

202 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

 Supported codecs: H.264 (CBR, capped VBR, statmux), HEVC (CBR),


MPEG-2 video (CBR), AAC-LC, AAC-HE v1, AAC-HE v2, MPEG-1 Layer
II, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital +.
 Video preprocessing: resize, frame-rate adaptation, clipping, logo
insertion.
 Audio preprocessing: Dolby stereo downmixing, mixer, resampler,
audio loudness control, delay.

Favorites/Live Web TV Transcoder Item


This workflow allows generating WebTV outputs for a service from a TS
over IP input.
 Supported outputs: HLS, MPEG-DASH, RTMP, Smooth Streaming,
MPEG-2 TS. DRM are supported.
 Supported codecs: H.264, HEVC, AAC-LC, AAC-HEv1, AAC-HEv2. Up to
12 video profiles.
 Video preprocessing: resize, frame-rate adaptation, DVB-Subtitle
inserter, clipping, VBI blanking, logo insertions (global or per profile),
text insertions (global or per profile).
 Audio preprocessing: Dolby stereo downmixing, mixer, resampler,
audio loudness control, delay.
 Blackout management.

Workflow Library: Samples


The following sample workflows are provided:
 Sample IP TV 1
 Sample Web TV HLS 1
 Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 1
 Sample Web TV Smooth Streaming 2

These workflows are presented in Section ’Creating a Job Based on a


Sample Workflow’ on page 46.

Tools
The Selector and Choice tools let you define a condition to choose the
input or output that should be used, respectively. They are both built the
same way.

Dialog Description
The dialog contains two parts.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 203


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Parameter
 Create a parameter to be used in the condition: check the box if you
want the job’s author to set a parameter that will be used in the
condition to choose the output. Edit the cells to create the parameter.

Conditions

The array lets you set a condition for each output. Double-click in the
Condition column or click the button to access the condition editor.
This editor is described in Section ’Item Parameters Array’ on page 130.

You can add inputs or outputs if needed.

Choice
The Choice tool lets you define a condition to choose the output that
should be used. For example, let us imagine you want to send the stream
to a different output based on the input bitrate, e.g. send it to output A if
the bitrate is lower than 80,000 kbps, and to output B if it is higher.

To use the Choice tool, you first need to have in your workflow a public
parameter with a label. For our example, publish and give a label to the
bitrate parameter in the input item.

Insert the Choice item in your configuration and link it to the preceding
item.

Figure 3-159. Inserting the Choice item in a workflow

Use the condition editor to perform your configuration. For our example,
set the condition of the Choice item as shown below.

Figure 3-160. Example of condition configuration for a Choice item

Selector
The Selector tool lets you define a condition to choose the input that
should be used. It works basically the same way as the Choice tool, but
reversely.

204 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Workflow Library Content Parameters

Let us take an example: a configuration contains two inputs: one TS over


IP input and one TS file input. We want the job author to choose whether
to use one input or the other. We thus use the Selector tool, as shown in
Figure 3-161.

Figure 3-161. Example of use of the Selector tool

Figure 3-162 shows the parameters set for the Selector tool.

Figure 3-162. Selector properties

In our example, we create a parameter called Use TS file to be used in the


condition and we limit the possible values to true or false.

Then we set the condition as follows:


 Input #1, i.e. the TS over IP input, must be used if the Use TS file
parameter is set to false.
 Input #2, i.e. the TS file input, must be used if the Use TS file
parameter is not set to false (i.e. true).

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 205


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Recommended Settings

Recommended Settings

Recommended H.264 Bitrates in IPTV


Assuming the following settings:
 Profile = Main/High, Level = Auto
 Output Frame Structure = Progressive for 720p, Interlaced for all 1080i,
576i, 480i
 Mode = Premium
 I Period = 24, P Period = 8 (25 fps)
I Period = 32, P Period = 8 (30 fps)
I Period = 48, P Period = 8 (50 fps)
I Period = 64, P Period = 8 (60 fps)
 Hierarchical GOP = true
 Adaptive GOP = true
 Close GOP Period = 0
 Coder delay = standard
 Decoder delay = 1000 ms
 Deblocking = medium
 Psycho-visual enhancement (PVE) = On (for best video quality)

All / Complex Contents

Table 3-11. Recommended H.264 video bitrate in IPTV - All or Complex contents

Channel sensitive Quality sensitive Pristine quality


Resolution
(Mbit/s) (Mbit/s) (Mbit/s)

1920x1080i - 50/60 4.9 6.4 7.9

1440x1080i - 50/60 4.2 5.6 6.8

1280x720p - 50/60 4.2 5.5 6.7

720x576i - 50 1.8 2.1 2.4

544x576i - 50 1.4 1.7 1.9

720x480i - 60 1.6 1.9 2.1

544x480i - 60 1.3 1.5 1.7

206 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Recommended Settings

Simple / Movie Contents

Table 3-12. Recommended H.264 video bitrate in IPTV - Simple or Movie contents

Channel sensitive Quality sensitive Pristine quality


Resolution
(Mbit/s) (Mbit/s) (Mbit/s)

1920x1080i - 50/60 2.8 3.5 4.4

1440x1080i - 50/60 2.4 3 3.6

1280x720p - 50/60 2.3 2.9 3.6

720x576i - 50 1.2 1.4 1.6

544x576i - 50 0.9 1.1 1.3

720x480i - 60 1.1 1.3 1.4

544x480i - 60 0.9 1 1.2

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 207


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Recommended Settings

Recommended H.264 Bitrates in WEBTV


Assuming the following settings:
 Profile = Main/High, Level = Auto
 Output Frame Structure = Progressive
 Mode = Premium
 I Period = 24, P Period = 8 (25 fps) , I Period = 32, P Period = 8 (30 fps)
 Hierarchical GOP = true
 Adaptive GOP = true
 Close GOP Period = 0
 Coder delay = standard
 Decoder delay = 2000 ms
 Deblocking = medium
 Psycho-visual enhancement (PVE) = On (for best video quality)

If Mode = High density then increase bitrate by 20%

If Profile = Baseline then increase bitrate by 30%

208 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Recommended Settings

All / Complex Contents

Table 3-13. Recommended H.264 video bitrate in WebTV - All or Complex contents

Resolution - Channel sensitive Quality sensitive Pristine quality


Frame rates (Mbit/s) (Mbit/s) (Mbit/s)

1920x1080p - 25/30 4.3 4.9 5.9

1280x720p - 25/30 2.8 3.5 4.4

960x540p - 25/30 2.1 2.4 2.9

704x528p - 25/30 1.6 1.8 2.2

704x396p - 25/30 1.2 1.4 1.7

640x480p - 25/30 1.3 1.6 1.9

640x360p - 25/30 1.0 1.2 1.5

480x320p - 25/30 0.80 0.93 1.1

480x270p - 25/30 0.72 0.86 1.0

400x300p - 25/30 0.70 0.83 0.98

400x224p - 25/30 0.58 0.72 0.83

320x240p - 25/30 0.53 0.66 0.77

320x180p - 25/30 0.47 0.60 0.68

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 209


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Recommended Settings

Simple / Movie Contents

Table 3-14. Recommended H.264 video bitrate in WebTV - Simple or Movie contents

Resolution - Channel sensitive Quality sensitive Pristine quality


Frame rates (Mbit/s) (Mbit/s) (Mbit/s)

1920x1080p - 25/30 2.5 3.1 3.9

1280x720p - 25/30 1.7 2.1 2.5

960x540p - 25/30 1.2 1.5 1.9

704x528p - 25/30 0.91 1.1 1.4

704x396p - 25/30 0.74 0.90 1.1

640x480p - 25/30 0.79 0.96 1.2

640x360p - 25/30 0.65 0.80 0.95

480x320p - 25/30 0.48 0.59 0.69

480x270p - 25/30 0.42 0.53 0.62

400x300p - 25/30 0.40 0.50 0.59

400x224p - 25/30 0.33 0.41 0.50

320x240p - 25/30 0.30 0.37 0.46

320x180p - 25/30 0.26 0.33 0.41

210 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Recommended Settings

Recommended H.264 Statmux Settings


Assuming the following settings:
 Profile = Main/High, Level = Auto
 Frame Structure = Progressive for 720p, Interlaced for all 1080i, 576i,
480i
 Mode = Premium
 I Period = 24, P Period = 8 (25 fps)
I Period = 32, P Period = 8 (30 fps)
I Period = 48, P Period = 8 (50 fps)
I Period = 64, P Period = 8 (60 fps)
 Hierarchical GOP = true
 Adaptive GOP = true
 Close GOP Period = 0
 Deblocking = medium
 Psycho-visual enhancement (PVE) = On (for best video quality)

Table 3-15. Recommended H.264 Statmux Settings

Default (Mbit/s)
Resolution Min (Mbit/s) Max (Mbit/s)
/Quality

1920x1080i - 50/60 1.0 6.0 / 60 12.0

1280x720p - 50/60 0.8 4.0 / 60 8.0

720x576i - 25 0.3 2.0 / 60 6.0

720x480i - 30 0.3 2.0 / 60 6.0

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 211


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 3 ’Web Graphical Interface’ — Recommended Settings

BLANK PAGE

212 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
4
Chapter
Servicing

In this Chapter
’Upgrading the Firmware’ ..........................................................page 214

’Unmounting the Front Panel on a 1RU Server’.....................page 215

’Adding a Diskless Node to Your System’ ...............................page 216

’Adding Options’ ..........................................................................page 229

’Replacing a Diskless Node for your System’.........................page 230

’Upgrading OnBoard Administrator firmware’.......................page 231

’Upgrading Flex10 firmware’ .....................................................page 232

’Replacing a Hot Swappable Part’.............................................page 234

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 213


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Upgrading the Firmware

Upgrading the Firmware


To upgrade the firmware:
1. Read carefully chapter 6 "Interoperability & Limitations" of the Release
Note of the new version you want to install.
2. Go to the Setup tab and choose the Download category.
3. Refer to Section ’Setup/Download’ on page 82.

When you apply a new software version, jobs that were running are
stopped and recreated on the newly active release. This procedure
implies a short service interruption.

If you are upgrading from a 02.20 version (or later) to a newer version,
the smooth upgrade mechanism applies: jobs are processed
successively, and for each job:
1. The job is created in the new version, in mute mode.
2. Once the job is properly running, it is unmuted and the job in the old
version is muted.
3. The job in the old version is deleted.

The smooth upgrade mechanism is not available for jobs that use a
virtual IP address, for instance TS over IP unicast inputs or Web TV
outputs when the stream is available on the local Web server. Those
jobs are stopped and recreated in the version.
Note that TS over IP outputs do not use a virtual IP address, and thus
the smooth upgrade can be used.

The smooth upgrade can be used only if the system CPU and
memory resources are sufficient to duplicate the jobs. Otherwise,
jobs are stopped and recreated in the new version.

214 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Unmounting the Front Panel on a 1RU Server

Unmounting the Front Panel on a 1RU Server


It is not necessary to unmount the front panel to reboot the server, as the
front panel features a deported ON/OFF button.

However, to add or replace a disk or access the slide-out display, you


need to remove the front panel. To do so, proceed as follows:
1. Grab the middle of the front panel and pull to bend it.

Figure 4-1. Unmounting the front panel – Bending the middle to disengage the right side

2. Disengage the right side of the front panel from the notches of the
server.
3. Disengage the left side of the front panel.

Figure 4-2. Unmounting the front panel – Disengaging the left side

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 215


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Adding a Diskless Node to Your System

Adding a Diskless Node to Your System


If you want to expand your system by adding diskless nodes, you first
need to purchase the physical nodes and rack them. You then need to
enable, configure and finally declare them in the system. This section
explains how to perform these operations for the 1RU, 6RU, and 10RU
systems.
Install the new blades in the blade center or the 1RU device in the rack as
explained in the ’Installation and Startup’ chapter. In the case of a 1RU
device, connect it like the other devices in the system.

Enabling the New Diskless Node (6RU and 10RU)


Once you have racked a new node, you need to enable it. To do so, follow
the procedures below.

Connecting to the ILO Interface


1. Launch Internet Explorer
2. Enter the IP address of the ILO interface of the blade center. For more
information, see Section ’Connecting to the HP Monitoring Tools’
on page 256.
3. Enter the user name and the password indicated on the asset tag.

Figure 4-3. Connection to the ILO interface

The HP OnBoard Administrator interface is displayed.

Enabling the Node


1. In the HP OnBoard Administrator page, point to Enclosure
Information, Enclosure Settings and select Enclosure Bay IP
Addressing.

216 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Adding a Diskless Node to Your System

2. Select the new node you have just racked and check the box in the
Enabled column.

Figure 4-4. Enabling the new diskless node

Configuring the BIOS of a Diskless Node


Once the new node is enabled, follow the procedures below to configure
it.

For a 6RU or 10RU blade: Accessing the BIOS


In the HP BladeSystem Onboard Administrator, click the Rack Overview
link in the tree on the left.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 217


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Adding a Diskless Node to Your System

Figure 4-5. HP OnBoard Administrator interface

1. Click the Front View.


2. Select a node.

Figure 4-6. Selecting a node from the HP OA interface

Setting the Boot Options of the Blade


1. Still from the OnBoard Administrator interface Front View, select the
Boot Options tab.

Figure 4-7. Accessing the Boot options

218 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Adding a Diskless Node to Your System

2. From the One Time Boot from drop-down list, choose RBSU
(ROM-Based setup utility). This option lets the server reboot directly
on the BIOS parameters without any particular action.

Figure 4-8. Setting the boot option

3. Apply the change.


4. Select the Virtual Devices tab.

Figure 4-9. Selecting the Virtual Devices tab

5. Click the Cold Boot button.

Figure 4-10. Clicking the Cold Boot button

The blade center boots on the BIOS parameters.

Accessing the System KVM


1. Select the Status tab.

Figure 4-11. Accessing the Status

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 219


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Adding a Diskless Node to Your System

2. Choose ILO.

Figure 4-12. Selecting the ILO

3. Click Integrated Remote Console.

Figure 4-13. Accessing the Integrated Remote Console

4. Run the application.

For the ILO3 firmware version 1.20, the framework .net 3.5 must be
installed on the machine on which Internet Explorer is launched.
If the PC has an Internet connection, the installation is automatically
suggested.
This installation is only necessary the first time the PC is used, for
integration.

For 1RU Devices: Accessing the BIOS


1. Connect a mouse and screen to your ViBE VS7000 device.

220 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Adding a Diskless Node to Your System

2. Start the device and launch the BIOS configuration.

Setting the BIOS Parameters

Figure 4-14. BIOS parameters

In the BIOS parameters, use the following commands:


 To move, use the up and down arrows.
 To go back to the previous screen, press Esc.
 To validate, press Enter.

Enabling the Network Boot Support on NIC 2 (Blade Centers Only)


1. From the main menu of the BIOS, choose System Options.

Figure 4-15. Accessing the system options

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 221


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Adding a Diskless Node to Your System

2. Select Embedded NICs.

Figure 4-16. Selecting the embedded NICs

3. Select NIC 2 Boot Options.

Figure 4-17. Accessing the NIC boot options

A warning message is displayed.

Figure 4-18. Warning message when setting the NIC boot options

222 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Adding a Diskless Node to Your System

4. Press Enter to continue.


5. Choose Network Boot.

Figure 4-19. Enabling the network boot

Modifying the HP Power Profile


1. Go back to the main menu of the BIOS.
2. Select Power Manager Options and press Enter twice.
3. Select Maximum Performance.

Figure 4-20. Selecting the HP power profile

4. Press Enter to apply the change.

Setting the Advanced Power Management Options


1. Select Advanced Power Management Options.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 223


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Adding a Diskless Node to Your System

On G7 blades and servers:


2. Select the Memory Interleaving submenu.
3. Choose the Full Interleaving option.

Figure 4-21. Setting the memory interleaving on G7 blades and servers

On Gen8 blades and servers:


2. Select the Channel Interleaving submenu.
3. Choose the Enabled option.

Figure 4-22. Setting the memory interleaving on Gen8 blades and servers

224 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Adding a Diskless Node to Your System

Setting the Advanced Performance Tuning Options


1. Go back to the main menu.
2. Select Advanced Options.
3. Select Advanced Performance Tuning Mode.

Figure 4-23. Accessing the advanced performance tuning options

4. Press Enter.
5. Select Node Interleaving.

Figure 4-24. Setting the node interleaving

6. Press Enter to access the parameters.

A warning message is displayed.

Figure 4-25. Warning message when setting the node interleaving

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 225


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Adding a Diskless Node to Your System

7. Press Enter to continue.


8. Select Enabled.

Figure 4-26. Enabling the node interleaving

Rebooting the Node


1. Go back to the main menu of the BIOS.
2. Press Esc several times until reaching the menu shown in Figure 4-27.

Figure 4-27. Exiting the BIOS menu

3. Press F10 to reboot the node with the new BIOS parameters.

226 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Adding a Diskless Node to Your System

Requesting a New License File


To add a node to your system, Thomson Video Networks needs technical
information on your system to be able to answer your request. To
facilitate this, the GUI lets you generate a file that contains all the
information that Thomson Video Networks needs to identify your system
and to generate a new license file for you.

To request a license for adding a node, proceed as follows:


1. In the GUI, point to the Hardware tab and click the Nodes category.
2. Click New license request.

Figure 4-28. New license request dialog

3. In the displayed dialog, the new nodes appear in the Available nodes
column. Sort the nodes by placing the nodes for which you want a
license in the Nodes to use column.
Tip: If needed, you can discover nodes from this dialog.
4. When you are done, click the Generate license request button.
5. Enter a name for the resulting file (without the extension) and validate.
6. Send this request file to your Thomson Video Networks sales
representative.

This process is only needed if you need to add a node to your ViBE
VS7000 system. For other license requests, simply make the
request to your sales representative.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 227


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Adding a Diskless Node to Your System

Declaring a New License File


Once you have received your new license file, proceed as follows:
1. In the GUI, point to the Download tab.
2. On the upper-right corner, click Download new license.

Figure 4-29. Downloading a new license file

3. Select the new license file that Thomson Video Networks sent to you
and click Open.

The new nodes declared in the new license file are now operational.

Adding a Diskless Node to Your System (1RU)


If you want to expand your system by adding an additional server, you
first need to purchase the physical diskless nodes.
1. Plug them in the same way as the other system nodes.
2. Run the VS7000 GUI, point to the Hardware tab and click the Nodes
category.
3. Click Discover.

Perform the "New license file" and "Declaring New license file" steps as
for the 6RU or 10 RU systems.

228 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Adding Options

Adding Options
To add options to your system, contact your Thomson Video Networks
sales representative and provide the following information:
 Commercial references and number of licenses to add.
 Serial number of your VS7000 equipment, available in the About box
in the graphical user interface.

Upon payment, you will receive a new license file.

To declare this license file in your system, proceed as described above in


section ’Declaring a New License File’.

The new option declared in the new license file is now available on the
system.

Adding licenses has no impact on the running jobs.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 229


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Replacing a Diskless Node for your System

Replacing a Diskless Node for your System


To replace a diskless node for your system, you need to configure the
BIOS of the new node. After that, the process is basically the same as for
declaring a new node.

Contact your Thomson Video Networks sales representative to buy a


new node.

Configuring the BIOS of the New Node


The process is exactly the same as when adding a new diskless node.
Follow all steps of the procedure described in Section ’Configuring the
BIOS of a Diskless Node’ on page 217.

Replacing a Node
To replace the node, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the node from your VS7000:
 For a 1RU server: switch off the front panel and power the device
off.
 For a blade server: remove the blade (no specific precautions to
take).
2. Insert the new node at the old one’s location:
 For a 1RU server: cable the device and start it using the front
panel.
 For a blade server: insert the new blade and start it using the
front panel.
3. In the GUI, click New license request, then Discover. The new node is
displayed in the Available nodes list.
4. Select the node to replace from the Nodes to use list and put it in the
Available nodes list.
5. Inversely, select the new node from the Available nodes list and put it
in the Nodes to use list.
6. Click Generate license request.
7. Enter a name for the resulting file (without the extension) and validate.
8. Send this request file to your Thomson Video Networks sales
representative. When you receive the new license file to download,
refer to Section ’Declaring a New License File’ on page 228 to know
how to declare it.

230 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Upgrading OnBoard Administrator firmware

Upgrading OnBoard Administrator firmware


To upgrade the version of your OnBoard Administrator software, follow
the procedure below.

Connecting to the ILO Interface


1. Run Internet Explorer
2. Enter the IP address of the blade center ILO interface. For more
information, see Section ’Connecting to the HP Monitoring Tools’
on page 256.
3. Enter the user name and password indicated on the asset tag.

The HP OnBoard Administrator interface is displayed.


4. To upgrade the OA firmware, select Enclosure Settings, Active
OnBoard Administrator, Upgrade setting view.

Figure 4-30. HP configuration interface – Firmware Update page

5. Check the current firmware version in the Firmware information table.


6. Select the new firmware and click upload.

Before performing any upgrade, read the Compatibilities section


in the ViBE_VS7000-ReleaseNotes-vxx.xx.00-edx document on
the CD ROM supplied with the equipment and check that there is no
limitation on the type of firmware version supported with your
version.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 231


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Upgrading Flex10 firmware

Upgrading Flex10 firmware


First, you may want to check the Flex10 firmware version. To do so, follow
the procedure below.

Connecting to the ILO Interface


1. Run Internet Explorer
2. Enter the IP address of the blade center ILO interface. For more
information, see Section ’Connecting to the HP Monitoring Tools’
on page 256.
3. Enter the user name and password indicated on the asset tag.

The HP OnBoard Administrator interface is displayed.


4. To upgrade the Flex10 firmware, select Enclosure Settings, Virtual
Connect Manager view.

Figure 4-31. HP configuration interface – Virtual Connect Manager selection

The Virtual Connect Manager is opened. The firmware version is


displayed.

Figure 4-32. HP configuration interface – Virtual Connect Manager page

To upgrade the Flex10 version, follow the procedure below.

232 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Upgrading Flex10 firmware

1. Install the HP Virtual Connect Support Utility Set (VCSU) available on


the CD ROM in the FLEX10 directory on your remote desktop.
2. Open a windows console.
3. Go to the VCSU directory
Type cd C:\Program Files\Hewlett-Packard Company\Virtual
Connect Support Utility
4. Type the following command:
vcsu.exe -a update -i XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX -u Administrator -p
pwdOA -vcu Administrator -vcp pwdFlex10 -l "C:\Integrati
on-VS7000\vcfwall370.bin"

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: Target OA IP address


pwdOA: OA password
pwdFlex10: Flex10 password
C:\Integration-VS7000\vcfwall370.bin: path of the Flex10
firmware upgrade
5. Type Y to confirm the operation when requested.
The upgrade may take up to 1 hour for the upgrade of the two Flex 10.
6. Check that all the modules have successfully been updated in the
windows console and again perform a Flex10 firmware version check
through the OA.

Upgrade trace example:


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HP BladeSystem c-Class Virtual Connect Support Utility
Version 1.5.2 (Build 173)
Build Date: Jan 6 2011 11:26:43
Copyright (C) 2007-2010 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
All Rights Reserved
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The following modules will be updated:
==============================================================================
Enclosure Bay Module Current Version New Version
==============================================================================
CZ3126JYDP 1 HP VC Flex-10 3.18 3.30
Enet Module 2011-04-01T22:57:39Z 2011-08-16T02:29:46Z
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CZ3126JYDP 2 HP VC Flex-10 3.18 3.30
Enet Module 2011-04-01T22:57:39Z 2011-08-16T02:29:46Z
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

During the update process, modules being updated will be temporarily unavailable. In addition, the
update process should NOT be interrupted by removing or resetting modules, or by closing the
application. Interrupting the update or the modules being updated may cause the modules to not be
updated properly.
Please verify the above report before continuing.
Would you like to continue with this update? [YES/NO]: YES
The following modules were updated successfully:
=======================================================================
Enclosure Bay Module New Version
=======================================================================
CZ3126JYDP 1 HP VC Flex-10 Enet Module 3.51 2011-08-16T02:29:46Z
CZ3126JYDP 2 HP VC Flex-10 Enet Module 3.51 2011-08-16T02:29:46Z

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 233


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Replacing a Hot Swappable Part

Replacing a Hot Swappable Part

6RU/10RU
The hot swappable parts are listed below.

Table 4-1. 6RU/10RU - Hot swappable parts

Code Description

NVSBLPN6AB Hot-swappable processing blade for VS7000 6RU platform.

NVSBLPN6AB Hot-swappable processing blade for VS7000 10RU platform.

NVSPSP60AB Hot-swappable AC power supply unit for VS7000 6RU platform.

VS7000-6RUSPA-DCP Hot-swappable DC power supply unit for VS7000 6RU platform.

NVSPSP10AB Hot-swappable AC power supply unit for VS7000 10RU


platform. Fits all single phase and triple phase platforms.

VS7000-10RUSPA-DCP Hot-swappable DC power supply unit for VS7000 10RU


platform. Fits 48V DC platform only.

Hot swappable Fan (6RU/10RU)

OnBoard Administrator (6RU/10RU)

To diagnose or confirm part failure and prepare on-site hardware service


provider maintenance, you may be requested to provide the following
information:
 Active Health System log
 In the HP OnBoard Administrator page, point to Enclosure
Information, Active On Board Administrator, System log.
 Save the logs from before the failure was detected to a text file.
 Onboard Administrator SHOW ALL report
 In the HP OnBoard Administrator page, point to Enclosure
Information, Enclosure Settings, Click the SHOW ALL link.
 Save the configuration to a text file.
 Product serial number.
 Product model name and number.
 Product identification number.
 Add-on boards or hardware.
 Third-party hardware or software.
 In the HP OnBoard Administrator page, point to Enclosure
Information and select the Information tab.
Save a screen shot of the Part Information table.

234 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Replacing a Hot Swappable Part

Figure 4-33. HP OnBoard Administrator page – Part Information table

 In the HP OnBoard Administrator page, point to Enclosure


Information and select Component Firmware.
Save a screen shot of the Firmware Information table.

Figure 4-34. HP OnBoard Administrator page – Firmware Information table

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 235


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Replacing a Hot Swappable Part

 In the HP OnBoard Administrator page, point to Enclosure


Information and select Device Bay.
Save a screen shot of the Device Bay status view.

Figure 4-35. HP OnBoard Administrator page – Device bay status

 Applicable error messages (IML)


 In the HP OnBoard Administrator page, point to Enclosure
Information, Device Bay and select the erroneous blade if any.
Save the log to a text file.
 Operating system type and revision level.
The information will be provided by THOMSON.

1RU Server
The hot swappable parts are listed below.

Table 4-2. 6RU/10RU - Hot swappable parts

Code Description

VS7000-1RUSPA-ACP Hot-swappable power supply unit for VS7000 1RU platform.

To diagnose or confirm part failure and prepare on-site hardware service


provider maintenance, you may be requested to provide the following
information:
 System Information / Health Summary
 Connect to the server HP iLO page as follows:
1. Plug an Ethernet cable on the active iLO port on the rear panel and
connect it to your Ethernet network.

236 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Replacing a Hot Swappable Part

2. On a remote computer, type the DNS name in the address bar of a


Web browser.
3. Enter the user name and password indicated on the asset tag. You are
now connected to the HP configuration interface.
 In the HP iLO page, point to Information, System information.
Save a screen shot of the subsystems and device status.
Save a screen shot of the failed subsystems by selecting the
corresponding tab.
 Technical support registration number (if applicable).
 Product serial number.
 Product model name and number.
 Product identification number.
 In the HP iLO page, point to Information, Overview.
Save a screen shot of the iLO overview.

Figure 4-36. HP iLO page – iLO overview

 The serial number and product ID information are also available


on the slide out information stick on the platform front panel.
 Applicable error messages (IML)
 In the HP iLO page, point to Integrated Management Log.
Save the log to a text file.
 Add-on boards or hardware.
 Third-party hardware or software.
 Operating system type and revision level.
The information will be provided by THOMSON.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 237


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 4 ’Servicing’ — Replacing a Hot Swappable Part

BLANK PAGE

238 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
5 Chapter
Troubleshooting

Introduction
If you face any problem with the equipment, follow the procedures
described in this section.

In this Chapter

’Troubleshooting Procedures’ ...................................................page 240

’Frequently Asked Questions’ ...................................................page 242

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 239


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 5 ’Troubleshooting’ — Troubleshooting Procedures

Troubleshooting Procedures

Exporting Information for Customer Support


If you have problems with workflows or jobs, there is a simple way to
export the information and send it to the customer support:
1. In the lower-right corner of the GUI, click Export.
2. Select the folder where you want to store the file and give it a name.

A zip file is created and contains the workflows configuration, the list of
jobs as well as the system configuration.
3. Send the resulting zip file to the customer support for analysis,
indicating the workflows or jobs that cause trouble.

The customer support might also need the following information:


 Network topology: provide the diagram.
 For a blade center:
 Flex10 configuration: export the Flex10 configuration as follows:
a. Open an SSH connection with the active Flex10 module,
for example using Putty.

b. Enter your login and password.

c. Type the following command: show config


The whole configuration is displayed.

d. Save the configuration to a text file.

e. Send the file to the support team.


 Enclosure information: to get this information, proceed as
follows:
a. From the HP OA interface, choose Enclosure Settings.

b. Select Configuration scripts.

c. Click the SHOW ALL link.

d. Save the configuration to a text file.

e. Send the file to the support team.

240 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 5 ’Troubleshooting’ — Troubleshooting Procedures

Modifying a Workflow from a Text Editor


If needed, you may perform some changes in the code, and then import
them back in the GUI to apply your changes. To do so:
1. Follow the steps described above to export the workflows
configuration to a zip file.
2. Find the XML file corresponding to the workflow you wish to modify
and extract it from the zip.
3. Open the XML file in a text editor.
4. Perform your changes.
5. Re-include the XML file of the workflow in the original ZIP file.
6. In the lower-right corner of the GUI, click Import and select the ZIP file.

The modified workflow is now available in the list of workflows.

Exporting Logs
To export logs, proceed as follows:
1. From the GUI, open the Setup tab.
2. Select the Logs category.
3. From the Export area, click the Export now button to export the logs
immediately.

A text file is generated with all the logs stored in the database.

For more information on the export feature, refer to Section ’Export’ on


page 85.

Using the Console


The Console tab is available only if you are logged with an administrator
account. It is described in Section ’Console Tab’ on page 124.

This tab should be used only under the customer support’s


supervision. If needed, the customer support team will indicate the
commands to send.

Providing Remote Access to the ViBE VS7000 System


The remote access must accept remote access of SSH type and Web
type, for example via a VPN.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 241


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 5 ’Troubleshooting’ — Frequently Asked Questions

Frequently Asked Questions

Why cannot I instantiate my job


whereas there is space on the ViBE VS7000 system?
Perform the following verifications:
 Check the coherence messages: there might be an explanation why
you cannot instantiate the job.
 Check that there is no license restriction. You may have reached the
maximum number of jobs you are authorized to instantiate.
 Check that the job is properly configured. If in a TS audio video
extractor item you have set an HD 1080i video when the source is
actually an SD video, the system will nevertheless allocate resources
for an HD video. The system will this be underused.
 Check that there is no Ethernet "link down" alarms. Indeed, if the job
is using a LAN for which the interface is disconnected, then the job will
not be instantiated.

I do not see my workflow in the list


when I want to create a job. Why?
Your workflow is probably non-instantiable. This might be because the
workflow contains no source. For instance, an encoding workflow in
which the input is not linked is not instantiable.

I cannot create a workflow. Why?


This is probably because you are not authorized to do so. If you have an
administrator account, you can modify the user account settings (refer to
Section ’Setup/User Accounts’ on page 81). Otherwise, contact your
administrator.

I cannot create a job. Why?


This is probably because you are not authorized to do so. If you have an
administrator account, you can modify the user account settings (refer to
Section ’Setup/User Accounts’ on page 81). Otherwise, contact your
administrator.

242 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 5 ’Troubleshooting’ — Frequently Asked Questions

When I want to launch a job, I get a "Job is waiting:


license not available" message. What should I do?
The "Job is waiting: license not available" message indicates that you are
already using all the licenses you own for this feature. You can check this
from the Setup tab, Download category by viewing the Quantity used /
Quantity max values.

In this case, the job stays in Waiting state until a license becomes
available.

I cannot modify the system parameters. Why?


This is probably because you are not authorized to do so. If you have an
administrator account, you can modify the user account settings (refer to
Section ’Setup/User Accounts’ on page 81). Otherwise, contact your
administrator.

I modified a workflow parameter, but it was not


applied to the currently running jobs. Why?
When modifying the default value of a private parameter of a workflow,
the value is applied for currently running jobs that are based on this
workflow. However, modifying the default value of a public parameter
does not affect running jobs based on this workflow. Indeed, the value
that is used is the value specified when creating the job, and not the
default value of the workflow.

My Windows network storage directory is not


accessible. What should I do?
If the VS7000 fails to access a destination storage location, the following
error will be raised: “Unreachable destination: Network storage XXXXX
on server XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX protocol CIFS”.
 Check that you have declared the mount point with the CIFS protocol.
 Check your shared folder rights. Your Windows user must be allocated
permission on both the Security and Sharing tabs.

The issue may also be with Windows. You may have to modify windows
registry keys to allocate more memory to share folders.
 Check the following registry key values and change them if they are
not correctly set.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 243


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 5 ’Troubleshooting’ — Frequently Asked Questions

 HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session
Manager\Memory Management\LargeSystemCache = 1
This key tells Windows to set aside enough system cache for
sharing large files.
 HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\LanmanServer\P
arameters\Size = 3
This value tells Windows to prioritize file sharing over reducing
memory usage.
Reboot your Windows server after key modification.

The SNMP agent does not work. What should I do?


In the Setup tab, SNMP category, check that the Read and Read/Write
communities are entered.

244 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
6 Chapter
Customer Service

Introduction
This chapter indicates what you should do if you have a problem with an
equipment, whether you need to repair it or to return it.

In this Chapter

’Support Center Contacts’..........................................................page 246

’Warranty’ .....................................................................................page 247

’Services’.......................................................................................page 248

’Spare Parts’ .................................................................................page 248

’Returning Equipment’................................................................page 248

’Repackaging for Shipment’ ......................................................page 248

’Long Term Product Support’ ....................................................page 249

’Recycling the Product’ ...............................................................page 249

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 245


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 6 ’Customer Service’ — Support Center Contacts

Support Center Contacts


 Our international call center provides Thomson team members to
answer your product and customer service questions. It is available by
phone or e-mail 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
The Thomson call center phone numbers are available on our website
(Service & Support / Contact Support page):
http://www.thomson-networks.com

After your call is logged by our call center, you are called back by a
technical support engineer.
 To contact the Thomson support center by email please write to us at:
Email: contact.support@thomson-networks.com
To ensure fast customer service please include the following
information when contacting Thomson by email:
 Your contract number
 Your geographical location (i.e. country you are in)
 The name of your product

246 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 6 ’Customer Service’ — Warranty

 Any additional system configuration information relating to


your product

Warranty
Thomson Video Networks guarantees that the product will be free from
defects in materials and workmanship, and that the product and/or
software will conform to the applicable specifications, within the
duration of the warranty.

The product is under warranty for a period of twelve (12) months.

The software is under warranty for a period of ninety (90) days.

Concerning the software warranty, Thomson guarantees that, for a


period of 90 days, after the product’s delivery date, or after a system’s
Site Acceptance Test, the physical media will be free from defects and
viruses and the embedded software will conform to applicable
specifications. There is no warranty that Thomson software will be
error-free. The purchase of a software license entitles the customer to use
the Thomson software release shipped at the time the license is
purchased. Rights to new releases (upgrades) are only provided through
a Thomson OneCare service level agreement or can be priced upon
request.

Concerning third party firmware & software (e.g. Java,


SunMicrosystems, etc.), when supplied with a Thomson product,
Thomson is not responsible for supplying any support or information
regarding said software.

Concerning Thomson products based on HP Servers, Hardware is


covered by the 1-year and Software by the 90-day Thomson Warranty
policy.
During the Thomson Warranty period, Thomson should serve as the
primary point of contact for support. In addition to the contractual
Thomson Warranty, when included free as part of the HP Global Limited
Warranty program, the HP services available locally should be used as
much as possible by the local Thomson support team to maximize
customer satisfaction.
After the Thomson Warranty period, the remainder of the HP Server
Hardware warranty period (generally 2 years) is automatically
transferred (linked to part and serial number) to the Customer. The local
HP Terms and Conditions then apply to the product warranty.

The Distributor Warranty Policy described in the individual


distributorship agreement applies.

For details on the Thomson warranty policy, please contact your


Thomson sales representative (list of sales representatives available on
the Thomson website at: http://www.thomson-networks.com

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 247


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 6 ’Customer Service’ — Services

Services
Training and assistance service offers are available and can be quoted for
upon request.

Thomson OneCare service level agreement offers apply to this product.

Spare Parts
The spare parts are listed in Table A-36 ’Ordering references for ViBE
VS7000’ on page 296, in the Spare Parts category.

Returning Equipment
Please contact the call center with questions about the process for
returning Thomson equipment. Within the standard Thomson warranty
period, there is a 30 day turnaround (factory in/out) guarantee for repairs.

Unless specifically agreed, cost and risks for return shipment of


equipment are borne by the Customer. The faulty device must be packed
where possible in its original packaging (protective corners and boxes) If
you no longer have the packaging, the faulty device must be protected
against shocks during the transportation. The company may not be held
liable for any consequence resulting from non-observance of this return
procedure. The company will not be able to guarantee a repair time for
any RMA request for which we do not have a clear and complete fault
description. If no fault is found, a fixed price will be raised to cover
shipping and testing of the unit.

Repackaging for Shipment


Retain original packaging — Unless specifically agreed, cost and risks for
return shipment of equipment are borne by the Customer. The faulty
device must be packed where possible in its original packaging
(protective corners and boxes) If you no longer have the packaging, the
faulty device must be protected against shocks during the transportation.
The company may not be held liable for any consequence resulting from
non-observance of this return procedure. The Thomson Customer
Service Department will examine packaging on arrival and can refuse to
carry out repairs if the packaging has been visibly damaged during
transportation and this has led to further damage in addition to the fault
originally noted.

For a blade center, the nodes and the SFP couplers must be removed
from the blade center for transport.

248 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 6 ’Customer Service’ — Long Term Product Support

The front panel must be removed from 1RU servers before repackaging.

Long Term Product Support


Long-Term Product Support (LTPS) is the Thomson support provided
during the product life cycle, starting at the announcement of the end of
product manufacture and ending at the announcement of the end of
services.

After product phase-out announcement, LTPS data is provided by the


Thomson Regional Sales and Field Services organizations.

The Thomson OneCare SLA commitment concerning LTPS data and


associated services may differ from those included as part of the general
Thomson LTPS policy. In such cases, LTPS data and associated services
governed by the terms and conditions of OneCare contracts override the
general LTPS policy.

Recycling the Product

Thomson Video Networks has developed a comprehensive


end-of-life product take back program for recycling or
disposal of end-of-life products. Our program meets the
requirements of the European Union’s WEEE Directive and,
in the United States, those of the Environmental Protection
Agency, individual state or local agencies.
Thomson Video Networks guarantees the proper disposal
of your end-of-life products. A Certificate of Recycling or a
Certificate of Destruction, depending on the ultimate
disposition of the product, can be sent upon request.
Thomson Video Networks will be responsible for all costs
associated with recycling and disposal, including freight,
however you are responsible for the removal of the
equipment from your facility and packing the equipment
ready for pickup.
For further information on the Thomson Video Networks
product take back system, please visit our website’s
Environmental Policy page:
http://www.thomson-networks.com/

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 249


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 6 ’Customer Service’ — Recycling the Product

BLANK PAGE

250 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 7
Tools

Introduction
This chapter describes the Equipment Set-up tool delivered in the
CD-ROM with the product as well as the monitoring tools delivered by
HP for the blade centers configuration.

In this Chapter

’Equipment Setup’.......................................................................page 252

’HP Monitoring Tools (6RU and 10RU Devices)’.....................page 256

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 251


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 7 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup

Equipment Setup

Overview
The Equipment Set-up tool provided by Thomson Video Networks lets
you perform the setup of the equipment through the network. It also
lets you discover the equipment that is present on the local network,
and this even if their IP address is not configured.

This tool works only on interface 1 (System private LAN) of the system.

Operation
This section explains:
 How to launch the Equipment Set-up
 How to connect to a device
 How to set the system private LAN parameters

Launching Equipment Setup


1. Insert the CD-ROM supplied with your ViBE VS7000 product into your
CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the EquipmentSetup.jar file to launch the application.

Connecting to a Device

252 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 7 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup

Figure 7-1. Equipment set-up

To connect to a device:
1. Choose a mode of connection:
 If the IP address of the equipment is known and can be reached,
check the first option: IP address is known and reachable. This
method must be used if the equipment is not on the local
network, but can however be reached through routers.
 If the equipment is physically connected to the local network,
whatever its IP address, check the second option: IP address is
unknown or unreachable. When choosing this option, the list of
detected equipment on the local network is displayed (see
Figure 7-2). Criteria may be given, such as serial number and/or
part number.
2. Click Connect in the menu bar on the left.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 253


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 7 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup

Figure 7-2. List of detected equipment

For each piece of equipment, the following information is provided:


 Equipment name
 IP address (LAN1)
 Serial number
 Product type
 Version

254 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 7 ’Tools’ — Equipment Setup

3. Select one piece of equipment from the list and click Select to reach its
setup.

Setting Device Parameters

Figure 7-3. Equipment set-up settings

Once you are connected to a device, you can set a number of parameters
regarding the system private LAN:
 LAN number: number of the LAN, used to identify the LAN in logs.
 Address
 Mask
 Supervision address: this is a virtual IP address allocated to the master
node, allowing supervision of the ViBE VS7000 on this LAN. It allows
to connect to the ViBE VS7000 without knowing which node is
currently the master one.
 Addresses range

When the parameters are set, click Send to apply them to the equipment.

If the supervision PC is in DHCP, unplug and replug it so as to


force it to get a new address.
Number of necessary addresses = number of blades + 2.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 255


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 7 ’Tools’ — HP Monitoring Tools (6RU and 10RU Devices)

HP Monitoring Tools (6RU and 10RU Devices)

Connecting to the HP Monitoring Tools


To perform the IP configuration of a blade center, there are several steps.
The ViBE VS7000 device is delivered with a preconfiguration that you
may need to adapt to your needs and to complete.

There are several ways to connect to the device, depending on your


network configuration. All possibilities are described in the coming
sections.

Before you start, on the rear panel of the blade center, locate the Active
OnBoard Administrator module. Pull the tag attached to the OnBoard
Administrator and write down the DNS name, the user name and the
password indicated. You will need this information to connect to the
device.

Method #1: Connecting via the iLO Port in DHCP


The easiest way to connect to the device is using the iLO port. In this case
you need to have a DHCP server and a DNS server.

Proceed as follows:
1. Plug an Ethernet cable on the active iLO port on the rear panel and
connect it to your Ethernet network.
2. On a remote computer, type the DNS name in the address bar of a
Web browser.

Figure 7-4. HP configuration interface – login page

3. Enter the user name and password indicated on the asset tag.

You are now connected to the HP configuration interface.

256 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 7 ’Tools’ — HP Monitoring Tools (6RU and 10RU Devices)

Figure 7-5. HP configuration interface – welcome page

Method #2: Connecting on the DHCP Network


using the IP Address of the Device
If you have a DHCP server but you do not have a DNS server, you can
retrieve the IP address of the blade center from the front panel and use it
to connect to the equipment via the DHCP network.

To do so:
1. On the front panel of the ViBE VS7000 device, press OK to activate the
display.

Figure 7-6. ViBE VS7000 front panel screen – Main menu

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 257


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 7 ’Tools’ — HP Monitoring Tools (6RU and 10RU Devices)

2. Select Enclosure Info and press OK.

Figure 7-7. ViBE VS7000 front panel screen – Enclosure information

3. Note the IP address indicated in the Active OA field.


4. From a remote computer, type the IP address in the address bar.
5. Enter the user name and password indicated on the asset tag.

You are now connected to the HP configuration interface.

Method #3: Connecting After Manually Configuring


the IP Address of the Device
If you do not have a DHCP server nor a DNS server, you can configure the
IP address manually using the front panel.

To do so:
1. On the front panel of the ViBE VS7000 device, press OK to activate the
display.

Figure 7-8. ViBE VS7000 front panel screen – Main menu

258 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 7 ’Tools’ — HP Monitoring Tools (6RU and 10RU Devices)

2. Select Enclosure Settings and press OK.

Figure 7-9. ViBE VS7000 front panel screen – Enclosure settings

3. Select the OA1 IPv4 field and press OK.

Figure 7-10. ViBE VS7000 front panel screen – Onboard Administrator selection

4. Once again, select the OA1 IPv4 field and press OK.

Figure 7-11. ViBE VS7000 front panel screen – Onboard Administrator network mode

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 259


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 7 ’Tools’ — HP Monitoring Tools (6RU and 10RU Devices)

5. Set the Network Mode to static and press OK.


6. Select Accept and press OK.

Figure 7-12. ViBE VS7000 front panel screen – Onboard Administrator IP address setting

7. Use the arrows to enter the IP address in the OA1 IP field.


8. Select Accept and press OK.

Once the IP address is set, you can access the equipment remotely.
1. From a remote computer, type the IP address in the address bar.
2. Enter the user name and password indicated on the asset tag.

You are now connected to the HP configuration interface.

Performing the IP Configuration from the HP


Interface
Once you are connected to the HP configuration interface, you can
perform a variety of settings, and particularly the settings of the
interconnect bays. What we call interconnect bays are the HP VC Flex-10
Enet Modules.

Accessing the Interconnect Bays’ Management Console


Before configuring the interconnect bays, make sure you write down the
user name and password of each module. They are indicated on the label
on the rear panel of the blade center.

To connect to the interconnect bay:


1. From the tree menu on the left, select Enclosure Information,
Interconnect Bays and select a bay.

260 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 7 ’Tools’ — HP Monitoring Tools (6RU and 10RU Devices)

Figure 7-13. HP configuration interface – Interconnect bay

2. Click the Management Console link on the right.

You are redirected to a dedicated HP configuration interface.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 261


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 7 ’Tools’ — HP Monitoring Tools (6RU and 10RU Devices)

Figure 7-14. Accessing the HP Virtual Connect Manager interface

3. Enter the user name and password of the interconnect bay and click
Sign in.

Configuring the Interconnect Bays


Interconnect bays are delivered with a default configuration. If you need
to modify it, read the information below.

The ViBE VS7000 product requires an internal system network for


communication between the blades. This network must be linked to the
first interface of each blade. You must perform the first IP configuration
via this network.

Once you are logged in, perform the following global steps:
1. In the Ethernet networks category, define the LANs.
2. Assign the LANs to the output ports.
3. Modify the server profiles so that they see these networks.

When your configuration is complete, connect the Ethernet cables to the


interconnect bays.

Saving your Configuration


When your configuration of the interconnect bays is complete, you may
want to save it to a file for backup purposes. To do so:
1. From the HP Management Console, in the tree menu on the left, under
Domain Settings, choose Backup/Restore.

262 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 7 ’Tools’ — HP Monitoring Tools (6RU and 10RU Devices)

Figure 7-15. HP Virtual Connect Manager interface – Domain settings

2. If you wish to encrypt your backup, enter an encryption key in the field.
3. In the Backup Domain Configuration area, click the Backup
Configuration button.
4. Save your file.

If you need to restore this configuration, proceed as follows:


1. In the same configuration panel, click Browse in the Restore Domain
Configuration area and select your backup file.
2. Click the Restore Configuration button.

You can also use the Import/Export feature in script format, as described
in Section ’Exporting Information for Customer Support’ on page 240,
in the Enclosure information paragraph.

More Information
For more information on the HP configuration interface, refer to the HP
documentation available on the HP Website and on the CD-ROM.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 263


User Manual - Edition M
Chapter 7 ’Tools’ — HP Monitoring Tools (6RU and 10RU Devices)

BLANK PAGE

264 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
A Appendix
Technical Specifications

Introduction
This chapter gives:
 Specifications: mechanical, electrical, inputs and outputs, decoding,
pre-processing, encoding, etc.
 Standard compliance
 Ordering guide to order the device and its options

In this Chapter

’Electrical, Thermal and Mechanical Specifications’ .............page 266

’Input Specifications’ ..................................................................page 280

’Decoding Specifications’...........................................................page 282

’Processing Specifications’ ........................................................page 283

’Encoding Specifications’...........................................................page 284

’Output Specifications’ ...............................................................page 288

’Blade Center Physical Interface Specifications’ ....................page 293

’Control-Command Specifications’ ..........................................page 293

’Standard Compliance’ ...............................................................page 294

’Ordering Guide’ ..........................................................................page 296

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 265


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Specifications

Electrical, Thermal and Mechanical Specifications


For all specifications of your equipment, please refer to the HP Technical
Specifications provided on the CD-ROM.

Values in the tables in this section are based on N + N redundancy mode


for the power supply, unless specified otherwise.

VS7000 10RU

VS7000 10RU (AC 200-240V single phase)


VS7000 10RU fitted with 16 system storage and processing blades

Table A-1. VS7000 G7 10RU fitted with 16 blades (AC 200-240V single phase), Electrical
and Thermal specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current --------------------- < 210A @ 230V, < 2ms -------------------------

Total Input Power (W) 2268 4429 5443

Total Input VA 2314 4519 5554

Total Input Current (A)t 10.06 19.65 24.15

Input Current per cord (A) 1.68 3.27 4.02

Total Airflow (CFM) 180 352 560

Total Airflow (CCM) 5109 9978 15853

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 7734 15102 18561

266 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Table A-2. VS7000 Gen8 10RU fitted with 16 blades (AC 200-240V single phase), Electrical
and Thermal specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current --------------------- < 210A @ 230V, < 2ms -------------------------

Total Input Power (W) 1604 5035 6328

Total Input VA 1637 5137 6457

Total Input Current (A)t 7.12 22.34 28.07

Input Current per cord (A) 1.186 3.723 4.679

Total Airflow (CFM) 128 386 628

Total Airflow (CMM) 4 11 18

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 5470 17168 21577

Table A-3. VS7000 10RU fitted with 16 blades (AC 200-240V single phase),
Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions (H x W x D) 17.4 x 17.6 x 32 in / 442 x 447.04 x 813 mm

Weight 471 lbs / 213 kg

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 267


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

VS7000 10RU fitted with 8 system storage and processing blades

Table A-4. VS7000 G7 10RU fitted with 8 blades (AC 200-240V single phase), Electrical
and Thermal specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current --------------------- < 210A @ 230V, < 2ms -------------------------

Total Input Power (W) 1299 2535 3131

Total Input VA 1326 2587 3195

Total Input Current (A)t 5.77 11.25 13.89

Input Current per cord (A) 0.96 1.87 2.31

Total Airflow (CFM) 106 210 347

Total Airflow (CCM) 3011 5941 9817

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 4431 8645 10672

Table A-5. VS7000 Gen8 10RU fitted with 8 blades (AC 200-240V single phase), Electrical
and Thermal specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current --------------------- < 210A @ 230V, < 2ms -------------------------

Total Input Power (W) 973 2853 3574

Total Input VA 993 2911 3647

Total Input Current (A)t 4.32 12.66 15.86

Input Current per cord (A) 0.720 2.109 2.643

Total Airflow (CFM) 80 236 381

Total Airflow (CMM) 2 7 11

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 3320 9728 12188

268 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Table A-6. VS7000 10RU fitted with 8 blades (AC 200-240V single phase), Dimensions
and Weight

Dimensions (H x W x D) 17.4 x 17.6 x 32 in / 442 x 447.04 x 813 mm

Weight 357 lbs / 162 kg

VS7000 10RU (AC NA/JPN Triple Phase)


VS7000 10RU fitted with 16 system storage and processing blades

Table A-7. VS7000 G710RU fitted with 16 blades (AC NA/JPN Triple Phase), Electrical and
Thermal specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current ---------------- < 210A @ 208V, < 2ms ----------------------------
per Branch

Total Input Power (W) 2298 4425 5443

Total Input VA 2344 4515 5554

Total Input Current (A)t 6.51 12.53 15.42

Input Current per cord (A) 3.25 6.27 7.71

Total Airflow (CFM) 183 352 560

Total Airflow (CCM) 5176 9968 15853

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 7834 15088 18561

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 269


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Table A-8. VS7000 Gen8 10RU fitted with 16 blades (AC 380V triple phase), Electrical and
Thermal specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current ---------------- < 210A @ 208V, < 2ms ----------------------------
per Branch

Total Input Power (W) 1676 5066 6342

Total Input VA 1710 5170 6472

Total Input Current (A)t 4.75 14.35 17.96

Input Current per cord (A) 2.374 7.175 8.982

Total Airflow (CFM) 133 388 630

Total Airflow (CMM) 4 11 18

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 5715 17277 21627

Table A-9. VS7000 10RU fitted with 16 blades (AC 380V triple phase), Dimensions
and Weight

Dimensions (H x W x D) 17.4 x 17.6 x 32 in / 442 x 447.04 x 813 mm

Weight 471 lbs / 213 kg

270 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

VS7000 10RU fitted with 8 system storage and processing blades

Table A-10. VS7000 G710RU fitted with 8 blades (AC 380V triple phase), Electrical and
Thermal specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current ---------------- < 210A @ 208V, < 2ms ----------------------------
per Branch

Total Input Power (W) 1389 2555 3130

Total Input VA 1418 2608 3194

Total Input Current (A)t 3.94 7.24 8.86

Input Current per cord (A) 1.97 3.62 4.43

Total Airflow (CFM) 114 211 347

Total Airflow (CCM) 3219 5989 9817

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 4735 8710 10670

Table A-11. VS7000 Gen8 10RU fitted with 8 blades (AC 380V triple phase), Electrical and
Thermal specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current ---------------- < 210A @ 208V, < 2ms ----------------------------
per Branch

Total Input Power (W) 1073 2869 3582

Total Input VA 1095 2927 3655

Total Input Current (A)t 3.04 8.12 10.15

Input Current per cord (A) 1.519 4.062 5.073

Total Airflow (CFM) 88 237 382

Total Airflow (CMM) 2 7 11

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 3658 9782 12214

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 271


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Table A-12. VS7000 10RU fitted with 8 blades (AC 380V triple phase), Dimensions
and Weight

Dimensions (H x W x D) 17.4 x 17.6 x 32 in / 442 x 447.04 x 813 mm

Weight 357 lbs / 162 kg

VS7000 10RU (DC 48V)


VS7000 10RU fitted with 16 system storage and processing blades

Table A-13. VS7000 G7 10RU fitted with 16 blades (DC 48V), Electrical and Thermal
specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current ---------------- No Inrush current----------------------------

Total Input Power (W) 1950 3934 4829

Total Input VA 1950 3934 4829

Total Input Current (A)t 40.63 81.96 100.6

Input Current per cord (A) - - -

Total Airflow (CFM) 155 313 497

Total Airflow (CCM) 4393 8862 14065

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 6650 13414 16466

272 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Table A-14. VS7000 Gen8 10RU fitted with 16 blades (DC 48V), Electrical and Thermal
specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current ---------------- No Inrush current----------------------------

Total Input Power (W) 1368 4532 5677

Total Input VA 1368 4532 5677

Total Input Current (A)t 28.49 94.42 118.28

Input Current per cord (A) - - -

Total Airflow (CFM) 112 347 564

Total Airflow (CMM) 3 10 16

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 4664 15455 19360

Table A-15. VS7000 10RU fitted with 16 blades (DC 48V), Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions (H x W x D) 17.4 x 17.6 x 32 in / 442 x 447.04 x 813 mm

Weight 458 lbs / 208 kg

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 273


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

VS7000 10RU fitted with 8 system storage and processing blades

Table A-16. VS7000 G7 10RU fitted with 8 blades (DC 48V), Electrical and Thermal
specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current ---------------- No Inrush current----------------------------

Total Input Power (W) 1078 2214 2724

Total Input VA 1078 2214 2724

Total Input Current (A)t 22.46 46.12 56.74

Input Current per cord (A) - - -

Total Airflow (CFM) 88 191 302

Total Airflow (CCM) 2498 5406 8543

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 3676 7549 9288

Table A-17. VS7000 Gen8 10RU fitted with 8 blades (DC 48V), Electrical and Thermal
specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current ---------------- No Inrush current----------------------------

Total Input Power (W) 1078 2214 2724

Total Input VA 1078 2214 2724

Total Input Current (A)t 22.46 46.12 56.74

Input Current per cord (A) - - -

Total Airflow (CFM) 88 191 302

Total Airflow (CMM) 2 5 9

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 3676 7549 9288

274 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Table A-18. VS7000 10RU fitted with 8 blades (DC 48V), Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions (H x W x D) 17.4 x 17.6 x 32 in / 442 x 447.04 x 813 mm

Weight 345 lbs / 156 kg

VS7000 6RU

VS7000 6RU (AC 200-240V single phase @ 115VAC)

VS7000 6RU fitted with 8 system storage and processing blades

Table A-19. VS7000 G7 6RU fitted with 8 blades (AC 200-240V single phase @ 115VAC),
Electrical and Thermal specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current ---------------- < 140A @ 115V, < 2ms ----------------------------

Total Input Power (W) 1458 2751 3330

Total Input VA 1488 2807 3398

Total Input Current (A)t 12.94 24.41 29.55

Input Current per cord (A) 2.16 4.07 4.92

Total Airflow (CFM) 119 228 369

Total Airflow (CCM) 3378 6447 10445

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 4972 9381 11355

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 275


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Table A-20. VS7000 Gen8 6RU fitted with 8 blades (AC 200-240V single phase @ 115VAC),
Electrical and Thermal specifications in Power Supply Redundancy mode N +1

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current ---------------- < 210A @ 115V, < 2ms ----------------------------

Total Input Power (W) 1109 3030 3821

Total Input VA 1132 3092 3899

Total Input Current (A)t 9.84 26.89 33.90

Input Current per cord (A) 1.640 4.481 5.651

Total Airflow (CFM) 91 251 408

Total Airflow (CMM) 3 7 12

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 3781 10333 13030

Table A-21. VS7000 6RU fitted with 8 blades (AC 200-240V single phase @ 115VAC),
Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions (H x W x D) 10.4 x 19.1 x 32.977 in / 265 x 485 x 835 mm

Weight G7: 279 lbs / 126 Kg


Gen8: 252 lbs / 114 kg

276 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

VS7000 6RU (AC 200-240V single phase @ 230VAC)


VS7000 6RU fitted with 8 system storage and processing blades

Table A-22. VS7000 G7 6RU fitted with 8 blades (AC 200-240V single phase @ 230VAC),
Electrical and Thermal specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current ---------------- < 140A @ 115V, < 2ms ----------------------------

Total Input Power (W) 1418 2688 3271

Total Input VA 1447 2743 3338

Total Input Current (A)t 6.29 1.93 14.51

Input Current per cord (A) 1.05 1.99 2.42

Total Airflow (CFM) 116 222 362

Total Airflow (CCM) 3285 6300 10260

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 4835 9168 11154

Table A-23. VS7000 Gen8 6RU fitted with 8 blades (AC 200-240V single phase @ 230VAC),
Electrical and Thermal specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current ---------------- < 210A @ 115V, < 2ms ----------------------------

Total Input Power (W) 1076 3027 3704

Total Input VA 1097 3089 3779

Total Input Current (A)t 4.77 13.43 16.43

Input Current per cord (A) 0.795 2.238 2.739

Total Airflow (CFM) 88 250 395

Total Airflow (CMM) 2 7 11

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 3668 10321 12630

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 277


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Table A-24. VS7000 6RU fitted with 8 blades (AC 200-240V single phase @ 230VAC),
Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions (H x W x D) 10.4 x 19.1 x 32.977 in / 265 x 485 x 835 mm

Weight 281 lbs / 127 kg

VS7000 6RU (DC 48V)


VS7000 6RU fitted with 8 system storage and processing blades

Table A-25. VS7000 G7 6RU fitted with 8 blades (DC 48V), Electrical and Thermal
specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current ---------------- No Inrush current----------------------------

Total Input Power (W) 1993 3950 4867

Total Input VA 1993 3950 4867

Total Input Current (A)t 41.51 82.29 101.41

Input Current per cord (A) - - -

Total Airflow (CFM) 159 314 501

Total Airflow (CCM) 4489 8898 14177

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 6794 13469 16598

278 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Table A-26. VS7000 Gen8 6RU fitted with 8 blades (DC 48V), Electrical and Thermal
specifications

@100%
Idle Utilization Max
Circuit

Total system Inrush Current ---------------- No Inrush current----------------------------

Total Input Power (W) 1771 4348 5392

Total Input VA 1771 4348 5392

Total Input Current (A)t 36.89 90.58 112.34

Input Current per cord (A) - - -

Total Airflow (CFM) 141 346 555

Total Airflow (CMM) 4 10 16

Heat Dissipating Power (BTU) 6038 14826 18387

Table A-27. VS7000 6RU fitted with 8 blades (DC 48V), Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions (H x W x D) 17.4 x 17.6 x 32 in / 442 x 447.04 x 813 mm

Weight 381 4lbs / 174 kg

VS7000 1RU

VS7000 1RU (AC 100-240V single phase)


G7 Total Input Power: 295 W

Gen8 Total Input Power: 350 W

Dimensions and Weight:

Table A-28. VS7000 1RU (AC 100-240V single phase), Dimensions

Dimensions (H x W x D) 1.7 x 17.1 x 29.5 in / 43.2 x 434.7 x 746.7 mm

Weight 42.6 lbs / 19 kg

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 279


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Input Specifications

Live Inputs
 MPEG-2 TS MPTS/SPTS over IP (CBR & VBR)
 Bitrate range: 0 - 100 Mbps
 Supported protocols: TS/UDP/IP or TS/RTP/UDP/IP
 Packet sizes: 188/204
 Unicast and multicast, IGMP v2, IGMP v3, SSM
 IPV4 support

SDI Inputs
 Standards:
 SMPTE 259M (SD-SDI) (see ’SMPTE 259M-2008’)
 SMPTE 292M (HD-SDI) for dual and quad cards (see ’SMPTE ST
292-1:2011’)
 Supported video formats:
 SD: NTSC 480i59.94, PAL 576i50
 HD (for dual and quad cards only): 1080p25, 1080p29.97,
1080p30, 1080i50, 1080i59.94, 1080i60, 720p50, 720p59.94,
720p60
 4:2:2, 10 bits
 Supported audio formats:
 PCM:
- 48 kHz, 16 bits
- Mono, stereo, 5.1
- Up to 8 channels per SDI input on dual or quad cards (e.g.
8 mono or 4 stereo components), up to 16 channels on octo
cards.
 Compressed audio:
- Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Plus
- Up to 4 Dolby streams on a dual or a quad board, and to 8
Dolby streams on an octo board.
 Subtitles:
 Closed captions extraction: CEA-608-B & CEA-708-B, line 21 &
CDP/VANC
 SMPTE-2031
 OP-47 Subtitling Distribution Packet (SDP) format (the Vertical
Ancillary Multi-Packet format is not supported)

280 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

 Aspect ratio: WSS, AFD (RP186), AFD Ready (SMPTE 2016), Manual
 Connectors:
 For VS7000-1RUOPT-2SDI: BNC connectors.
 For VS7000-1RUOPT-4SDI: DIN 1.0/2.3 rather than larger BNC
connectors. 4 SDI female BNC connectors are delivered with the
board.
 For VS7000-1RUOPT-8SDI: DIN 1.0/2.3 rather than larger BNC
connectors. 8 SDI female BNC connectors are delivered with the
board.

SDI Matrices
The supported SDI matrices all support the Grass Valley protocol.

Table A-29. List of supported SDI matrices

Type Reference Name

8x8 SDI SL-SD0808-N-CP Nevion - VikinX Sublime

8x8 HD-SDI SL-HD0808-N-CP Nevion - VikinX Sublime

16x16 SDI SL-SD1616-N-CP Nevion - VikinX Sublime

16x16 HD-SDI SL-HD1616-N-CP Nevion - VikinX Sublime

32x32 SDI SL-SD3232-N-CP Nevion - VikinX Sublime

32x32 HD-SDI SL-HD3232-N-CP Nevion - VikinX Sublime

64x64 or more Concerto matrices

File Formats
 MPEG-2 TS input:
 Bitrate: 10 kbps - 50 Mbps
 Bitrate auto-detection (PCR based)
 SPTS & MPTS
 CBR and VBR (VBR MPTS not supported)
 NFS or CIFS
 MP4 input
 MPEG-2 PS input
 YUV input: I420 format (planar, 4:2:0, 8 bits)
 Supported image file formats:
 Gif (fixed and animated)
 Jpeg

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 281


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

 Png
 Tiff
 Bmp (windows bitmap)
 Tga (targa)

Decoding Specifications

Audio Decoding
 MPEG-1 Layer II, MPEG-2 Layer II
 AAC-LC, AAC-HE v1 / v2
 Dolby Digital / Dolby Digital Plus

Table A-30. Audio decoding specifications

MPEG-1 layer II Dolby Digital / Dolby


AAC
MPEG-2 layer II Digital Plus

AAC-LC, AAC-HE v1,


Profiles - -
AAC-HE v2

Mono, Stereo, Joint Stereo,


Modes Mono, stereo, 5.1 2.0 or 5.1
Dual Channel

 MPEG-1 LII and MPEG-2 LII:


Sampling 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
-
rates  MPEG-2 LII only: 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz or 24 kH

Video Decoding
 H.264 AVC
 MPEG-2 Video

282 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Table A-31. Video decoding specifications

MPEG-2a H.264

Format 4:2:0, 8 bits

Maximum 20 Mbps 12 Mbps (Standard)


bitrates 35 Mbps (Contribution)

Profiles Simple, Main, High Baseline, Main, High

Levels Low, Main, High up to 4.2

Resolution up to 720p60, 1080i60 or 1080p30

Implemented - 3:2 pull-down support


tools
- Closed captions extraction (CEA-608, CEA-708)
a
DigiCipher II is supported.

Processing Specifications

Video Processing
 Smart de-interlacing
 Picture resizing: up to 1920x1080
 Picture cropping/clipping
 Animated/static logo insertion
 Mosaic generation
 DVB-Subtitle burn-in video
 Static/crawling text insertion: Manual or file source.
Supported file types: UTF-8, UTF-16, UTF-32, BIG-5, GB18030, TIS-620,
SHIFT_JIS
 Frame-rate adaptation

Audio Processing
 Re-sampling: 8 to 48 kHz (8, 11.025, 12, 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz)
 5.1 / Stereo / mono conversions
 Dolby stereo down-mixing
 Static gain adjustment: -30 to +30 dBFS
 Automatic Loudness Control:
 Modes: Flat, EBU R128, A-Weighting
 Noise level: -90 to 0 dBFS

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 283


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

 Loudness target: -40 to 0 dBFS


 Compression ratio: 1 to 100
 Peak limiter: -40 to 0 dBFS
 Delay Adjustment from -3 s to + 3 s by step of 1 ms

Encoding Specifications

Audio Encoding
 MPEG-1 Layer II
 AAC-LC, AAC-HE v1 / v2
 Dolby Digital / Dolby Digital Plus

Table A-32. Audio encoding specifications

Supported Preferred
Mono/Stereo/ Bit range
Codec sampling rate sampling rate
5.1 [bits/s]
[kHz] [kHz]

AAC-HE v2 Stereo 8000-11999 22.05, 24 24

12000-17999 32 32

18000-39999 32, 44.1, 48 44.1

40000-56000 32, 44.1, 48 48

AAC-HE v1 Mono 8000-11999 22.05, 24 24

12000-17999 32 32

18000-39999 32, 44.1, 48 44.1

40000-56000 32, 44.1, 48 48

Stereo 16000-27999 32, 44.1, 48 32

28000-63999 32, 44.1, 48 44.1

64000-127999 32, 44.1, 48 48

64000 - 69999 32, 44.1, 48 32

5.1 70000 - 159999 32, 44.1, 48 44.1

160000 - 319999 32, 44.1, 48 48

284 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Table A-32. Audio encoding specifications

Supported Preferred
Mono/Stereo/ Bit range
Codec sampling rate sampling rate
5.1 [bits/s]
[kHz] [kHz]

AAC-LC Mono 8000-23999 16 16

24000-31999 16, 22.05, 24 24

32000-55999 32 32

56000-160000 32, 44.1, 48 44.1

160001-288000 48 48

Stereo 16000-31999 16 16

32000-39999 16, 22.05, 24 22.05

40000-95999 32 32

96000-111999 32, 44.1, 48 32

112000-320000 32, 44.1, 48 44.1

160000 - 239999 32 32

240000 - 279999 32, 44.1, 48 32


5.1
280000 - 639999 32, 44.1, 48 44.1

640000 - 800000 32, 48 48

MPEG-1 Layer 2 Mono 32000, 48000, 32, 44.1, 48 32, 44.1, 48


56000, 64000,
80000, 96000,
112000, 128000,
160000, 192000

Stereo 64000, 96000, 32, 44.1, 48 32, 44.1, 48


112000, 128000,
160000, 192000,
224000, 256000,
320000, 384000

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 285


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Table A-32. Audio encoding specifications

Supported Preferred
Mono/Stereo/ Bit range
Codec sampling rate sampling rate
5.1 [bits/s]
[kHz] [kHz]

Dolby Digital Mono 56000, 64000, 32, 44.1, 48 48


80000, 96000,
112000, 128000,
160000, 192000,
224000, 256000,
320000, 384000,
448000, 512000,
576000, 640000

Stereo 96000, 112000,


128000, 160000,
192000, 224000,
256000, 320000,
384000, 448000,
512000, 576000,
640000

5.1 224000, 256000,


320000, 384000,
448000, 512000,
576000, 640000

Dolby Digital Plus Mono 32000, 40000, 48 48


48000, 56000,
64000, 80000,
96000, 112000,
128000, 160000,
192000, 224000,
256000, 320000,
384000, 448000,
512000, 576000,
640000

Stereo 96000, 112000,


128000, 160000,
192000, 224000,
256000, 320000,
384000, 448000,
512000, 576000,
640000

5.1 192000, 224000,


256000, 320000,
384000, 448000,
512000, 576000,
640000

286 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Video Encoding
 H.264 AVC
 H.265 HEVC
 MPEG-2 Video

Table A-33. H.264 AVC, H.265 HEVC Video encoding specifications

Description
Characteristics
H.264 AVC H.265 HEVC

Format 4:2:0 – 8 bits

 H.264 Live: 10 Kbps – 12 Mbps  H.265Live: 10 Kbps – 4 Mbps


Rate
 H.264 File: 10 Kbps – 25 Mbps  H.265 File: 10 Kbps – 25 Mbps

CBR, Capped VBR, Statistical CBR


Bit rate control
multiplexing

 Maximum:  Maximum:
 H.264 Live: up to 1080i60, 720p60  H.265 Live: up to 1080p25.
or 1080p30.  H.265 File: up to 3840x2160p60
 H.264 File: up to 3840x2160p60
Resolution  Minimum: down to 64x64.  Minimum: down to 64x64.
 Frame-rate minimum: 5 fps.  Frame-rate minimum: 5 fps.
 Frame-rate maximum: 60 fps.  Frame-rate maximum: 60 fps.
 Horizontal and vertical resolutions  Horizontal and vertical resolutions
have to be a multiple of 2. have to be a multiple of 2.

 Baseline Profile  Main Profile


Profile  Main Profile  Compatibility HM11.1
 High Profile

1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 3.0, 3.1, 3.2, 1.0, 2.0, 2.1, 3.0, 3.1, 4.0, 4.1, 5.0, 5.1,
Level
4.0, 4.1, 4.2, 5.0, 5.1, 5.2 5.2

All profiles:  I, P, B slices


 I, P slices  Hierarchical B pictures
 Scene-cut/fade detection  Scene-cut/fade detection
 Deblocking filter  Adaptive P period (1, 2, 4, 8)
 Open GOP  Deblocking filter
 Closed captions insertion (CEA-608 /  Open/close GOP
Implemented CEA-708)
tools Baseline profile:
 CAVLC
Main/High Profile:
 Hierarchical B slices
 CABAC
 Interlace support: frame – field –
PAFF

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 287


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

Table A-34. MPEG-2 Video encoding specifications

Description
Characteristics
MPEG-2 Video

Format 4:2:0 – 8 bits

Rate 1 – 20 Mbps

Bit rate control CBR

 Maximum: up to 1080i60, 720p60 or 1080p30.


 Minimum: down to 64x64.
Resolution
 Frame-rate minimum: 5 fps.
 Horizontal and vertical resolutions have to be a multiple of 2.

 Simple Profile
Profile
 Main Profile

Level Low Level, Main Level, High Level, High1440 Level

 I, P, B slices
 Scene-cut detection
Implemented tools
 Interlace support
 Open GOP

Output Specifications

Live Output
 MPEG-2 TS MPTS/SPTS over UDP/IP or RTP/UDP/IP:
 Bitrate range: 10 kbps - 100 Mbps
 Packet size: 188
 CBR, VBR (i.e. without stuffing packets)
 Multicast / Unicast
 IP v4
 Video encapsulation: H.264 AVC, H.265 HEVC, MPEG-2 Video
 Audio encapsulation: AAC-LC, AAC-HE v1/v2, MPEG-1 Layer 2,
Dolby Digital / Dolby Digital Plus
 Pass-through: DVB-Teletext, DVB-Subtitles, SCTE-35, audio,
video, data, descriptors
 Adobe Flash / RTMP:
 RTMP push

288 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

 Adaptive bitrate
 Authentication: in FMS URL, adapted to Akamai server, or
adapted to Level3 server
 IP v4
 Video encapsulation: H.264 AVC
 Audio encapsulation: AAC-LC, AAC-HE v1, AAC-HE v2
 Apple HTTP Live Streaming:
 Adaptive bitrate
 Segmentation: chunks from 1 to 10 seconds, by steps of
1 second
 Protocol version 2, 4 and 5 (see document
’draft-pantos-http-live-streaming-11’)
 Encryption:
- Key servers: Nagra, Verimatrix, Irdeto v1.0 and v2.0
(PlayReady), Polymedia, Viaccess
- AES scrambling
 2 modes:
- Push: http PUT to a Web server
- Origin server: Apache Web server1
 IP v4
 Video encapsulation: H.264 AVC
 Audio encapsulation: AAC-LC, AAC-HE v1, AAC-HE v2
 Multi audio
 Support of radio program
 Subtitles:
- Closed caption (passthrough)
- WebVTT
- SMPTE-TT (including PNG images)
 Microsoft Smooth Streaming:
 Adaptive bitrate
 Segmentation
 Encryption:
- AES CBC, AES CTR, Microsoft PlayReady DRM
- BuyDrm, Irdeto, Polymedia, Technicolor, Viaccess

1. This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation

(http://www.apache.org/).

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 289


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

 2 modes:
- Push: http POST to an IIS server
- Origin server: Apache Web server1
 IP v4
 Video encapsulation: H.264 AVC
 Audio encapsulation: AAC-LC, AAC-HE v1, AAC-HE v2
 Support of radio program
 Subtitles:
- Closed caption (passthrough)
- DFXP
- SMPTE-TT (including PNG images)
 MPEG-DASH:
 Adaptive bitrate
 IPV4
 Video encapsulation: H.264 AVC, H.265 HEVC
 Audio encapsulation: AAC-LC, AAC-HE v1, AAC-HE v2
 Encryption: MPEG-CENC
 Compatibility with HbbTV: generation of a specific manifest for
this format
 Mode: ISO base media file format (see ’ISO/IEC 14496-12’)
 2 modes:
- Push: http PUT to a Web server
- Origin server: Apache Web server1
 Subtitles:
- Closed caption (passthrough)
- SMPTE-TT (including text or PNG images)

File Output
 MPEG-2 TS:
 CBR, packet size = 188
 Video: H.264, H.265, MPEG-2
 Audio: AAC-LC, AAC-HE v1, AAC-HE v2, MPEG-1 layer 2, Dolby
Digital, Dolby Digital Plus
 Subtitles:

1. This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation


(http://www.apache.org/).

290 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

- DVB subtitles (passthrough)


- DVB teletext (passthrough)
- Closed caption (passthrough)
 MP4:
 Supported tracks:
- Video: H.264, MPEG-2
- Audio: AAC-LC, AAC-HE v1, AAC-HE v2, MPEG-1 layer 2,
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus
 Progressive download
 Apple HTTP Live Streaming:
 Adaptive bitrate
 Segmentation: chunks from 1 to 10 seconds, by steps of
1 second
 Protocol version 2, 4 or 5 (see document
’draft-pantos-http-live-streaming-11’)
 Encryption:
- Key servers: Nagra, Verimatrix, Irdeto v1.0 and v2.0
(PlayReady), Polymedia
- AES scrambling
 Video encapsulation: H.264 AVC
 Audio encapsulation: AAC-LC, AAC-HE v1, AAC-HE v2
 Multi audio
 Support of radio program
 Subtitles:
- Closed caption (passthrough)
- WebVTT
- SMPTE-TT (including PNG images)
 Microsoft Smooth Streaming:
 Adaptive bitrate
 Segmentation
 File format: disk file format, wire file format
 Encryption:
- AES CBC, AES CTR, Microsoft PlayReady DRM
- BuyDrm, Irdeto, Polymedia, Technicolor
 Video encapsulation: H.264 AVC
 Audio encapsulation: AAC-LC, AAC-HE v1, AAC-HE v2

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 291


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

 Support of radio program


 Subtitles:
- Closed caption (passthrough)
- SMPTE-TT (including PNG images)
- DFXP
 MPEG-DASH:
 Adaptive bitrate
 Video encapsulation: H.264 AVC, H.265 HEVC
 Audio encapsulation: AAC-LC, AAC-HE v1, AAC-HE v2
 Encryption: MPEG-CENC
 Compatibility with HbbTV: generation of specific manifest for
this format (see ’HbbTV Version 1.5’)
 Mode: ISO base media file format (see ’ISO/IEC 14496-12’)
 File format: disk file format, wire file format
 Subtitles:
- Closed caption (passthrough)
- SMPTE-TT (including text or PNG images)

IP TV Latency
The formula to obtain the latency is as follows:

Latency = <input latency> + <Coder delay> / <Output frame rate> +


<Decoder delay> + <Optional processing latency>

With:
 Input latency:
 SDI input: 500 ms.
 TS/IP input: 1.4 seconds.
 Coder delay: this is the value configured in the H.264 AVC Encoder
item (see Section ’Encoding/H.264 AVC Encoder’ on page 164):
 Standard: 53 frames.
 Short: 39 frames.
 Ultra-short: 25 frames.
 Decoder delay: this is the value configured in the H.264 AVC Encoder
item (see Section ’Encoding/H.264 AVC Encoder’ on page 164).
 Output frame rate: it depends on the input frame rate, and on the
optional frame rate adaptation you may have added.

292 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Specifications

 Optional processing latency: it depends on the video processing you


have configured. It is null if there is no preprocessing.

Examples (without any video processing):


 SDI input, 25 fps, delay set to Standard: 4.1 seconds.
 SDI input, 25 fps, delay set to Short: 3.1 seconds.
 SDI input, 25 fps, delay set to Ultra-short: 2.3 seconds.
 SDI input, 60 fps, delay set to Standard: 2.9 seconds.
 TS/IP input, 60 fps, delay set to Standard: 4.2 seconds.

In Statmux mode, the formula to obtain the latency is as follows:


Latency = <input latency> + 61 / <Output frame rate> + 1400 ms +
<Optional processing latency>

Blade Center Physical Interface Specifications


Supported modules:
 SFP+ transceiver module - 10GBase-SR (optical) - 850nm - LC
multi-mode - plug-in module - up to 980 ft.
 SFP (mini-GBIC) transceiver module - 1000Base-SX (optical) - plug-in
module
 SFP (mini-GBIC) transceiver module - 1000Base-T (electrical) - plug-in
module

Control-Command Specifications
 IP v4
 Web services (http/SOAP)1

1. For more information on the Web services control-command,


refer to the Web Services SOAP API
document.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 293


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Standard Compliance

Standard Compliance
Table A-35. Standard compliance

Standards Title

MPEG-2. ISO/IEC 13818-1 Information Technology - Generic Coding of Moving


Pictures and Associated Audio information -
Part 1: Systems- June 2013

MPEG-2. ISO/IEC 13818-1 Draft Amendment 3 -Transport of HEVC video over


MPEG-2 Systems. 2013

MPEG-2. ISO/IEC 13818-2 Information Technology - Generic Coding of Moving


Pictures and Associated Audio information -
Part 2: Video - February 2000

MPEG-2. ISO/IEC 13818-3 Information Technology - Generic Coding of Moving


Pictures and Associated Audio information -
Part 3: Audio

MPEG-4. ISO/IEC 14496-10 Information technology - Coding of audio-visual objects


Part 10: Advanced video coding

MPEG-4. ISO/IEC 14496-15 Advanced Video Coding (AVC) file format. First edition,
April 2004

HEVC. ITU/T H.265 Infrastructure of audiovisual services - Coding of


moving video High Efficiency Video Coding April 2013

ETSI EN 300 468 Specification for Program Information (SI) in DVB


system

ETSI TR 101 162 Allocation of Service Information (SI) codes for DVB
systems

ETSI TR 101 211 Guidelines on implementation and usage of Service


Information (SI)

ETR 289 V1 Support for use the scrambling and conditional access
(CA) within DVB systems

ETSI TS 103 197 Head-End Implementation of DVB Simulcrypt

ETSI TR 101 154 Implementation Guidelines for the use of MPEG-2


Systems, Video and Audio in Satellite, Cable and
Terrestrial Broadcasting Applications

ETSI ETR 289 Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Support for use of
scrambling and Conditional Access (CA) within digital
broadcasting systems

ETSI TR 102 135, DVB Implementation Guidelines of the DVB Simulcrypt


Standard

ETSI TR 101 162, DVB Allocation of Service Information (SI) codes for DVB
systems

294 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Standard Compliance

Table A-35. Standard compliance

Standards Title

ETSI TS 103 197 DVB SimulCrypt Head-end implementation of DVB


SimulCrypt

ATSC-Mobile DTV Standard, Part 7 AVC and SVC Video System Characteristics, Document
A/153 Part 7:2009, 15 October 2009

The Protected Interoperable File Portable encoding of audio-video objects, Revised


Format (PIFF) 2010-03-09

draft-pantos-http-live-streaming-11 HTTP Live Streaming, April 16, 2013

IEEE 802.1Q IEEE Standard for Local and metropolitan area


networks--Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges and
Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks

ISO/IEC 23009-1:2012 Information technology - Dynamic adaptive streaming


over HTTP (DASH) - Part 1: Media presentation
description and segment formats

HbbTV Version 1.5 HbbTV Specification 6th March 2012

MS-SSTR v20120705 Smooth Streaming Protocol Specification

ETSI EN 300 743 DVB Subtitling systems Version 1.3.1, November 2001

ETSI EN 300 706 Enhanced Teletext Specification. Version 1.2.1, April


2004

ETSI EN 300 294 Television systems; 625-line television Wide Screen


Signalling (WSS). Version 1.4.1, April 2004

ISO/IEC 14496-12 ISO Base Media File Format

SMPTE 259M-2008 SMPTE STANDARD for Television — SDTV1 Digital


Signal/Data — Serial Digital Interface
Revision of SMPTE 259M-2006

SMPTE ST 292-1:2011 SMPTE STANDARD for Television — 1.5 Gb/s


Signal/Data Serial Interface
Revision of SMPTE 292-2008

IRTF RFC2250 RTP Payload Format for MPEG1/MPEG2 Video, January


1998

Recommendation ITU-R BS.1770-3 Algorithms to measure audio programme loudness and


true-peak audio level, August 2012

EBU Recommendation R 128 Loudness normalisation and permitted maximum level


of audio signals, August 2011

CableLabs OC-SP-EBP-I01-130118 Encoder Boundary Point Specification.


Version I01, January 2013

Comcast EBP-I01 2012-01 Encoder Boundary Point Specification.


Version I01, January 2012

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 295


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Ordering Guide

Ordering Guide

Table A-36. Ordering references for ViBE VS7000

Code Description

Base system

1RU

NVSSASP1AB VS7000 1RU platform for system storage & processing.


Equipped with dual HDD in RAID 1 configuration and dual
PSU.

NVSSAPP1AB VS7000 1RU platform for processing. Equipped with dual


PSU, no HDD.

6RU

NVSBSP60AB VS7000 6RU platform. Hosts up to 8 blades. Equipped with AC


100-240V single phase power feeding. Includes 6 fans and 6
PSUs. Includes redundant internal 10GiGE switches. Includes
redundant chassis manager boards.

NVSBSP62AB VS7000 6RU platform. Hosts up to 8 blades. Equipped with DC


48V power feeding. Includes 6 fans and 6 PSUs. Includes
redundant internal 10GiGE switches. Includes redundant
chassis manager boards.

10RU

NVSBSP10AB VS7000 10RU platform. Hosts up to 16 blades. Equipped with


AC 200-240V single phase power feeding. Includes 10 fans
and 6 PSUs. Includes redundant internal 10GiGE switches.
Includes redundant chassis manager boards.

NVSBSP11AB VS7000 10RU platform. Hosts up to 16 blades. Equipped with


AC 380V triple phase power feeding with IEC 309 16A cables
(international). Includes 10 fans and 6 PSUs. Includes
redundant internal 10GiGE switches. Includes redundant
chassis manager boards.

NVSBSP12AB VS7000 10RU platform. Hosts up to 16 blades. Equipped with


DC 48V power feeding. Includes 10 fans and 6 PSUs. Includes
redundant internal 10GiGE switches. Includes redundant
chassis manager boards.

NVSBSP13AB VS7000 10RU platform. Hosts up to 16 blades. Equipped with


AC 208V triple phase power feeding with NEMA L15-30P
cables (US, Japan). Includes 10 fans and 6 PSUs. Includes
redundant internal 10GiGE switches. Includes redundant
chassis manager boards.

296 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Ordering Guide

Table A-36. Ordering references for ViBE VS7000 (...)

Code Description

Hardware options

1RU

VS7000-1RUOPT-IP Additional quadriport GigE interface board for VS7000 1RU


platforms.

VS7000-1RUOPT-2SDI Additional dual-port SDI/HD-SDI interface board for VS7000


1RU platforms.

VS7000-1RUOPT-4SDI Additional Quad-port SDI/HD-SDI interface board for VS7000


1RU platforms.

VS7000-1RUOPT-8SDI Additional octo-port SDI interface board for VS7000 1RU


platforms.

6RU

NVSBLSN6AB Hot-swappable system storage and processing blade for


VS7000 6RU platform. Equipped with dual HDD in RAID 1
configuration.

NVSBLPN6AB Hot-swappable processing blade for VS7000 6RU platform.

10RU

NVSBLSN1AB Hot-swappable system storage and processing blade for


VS7000 10RU platforms. Equipped with dual HDD in RAID 1
configuration.

NVSBLPN1AB Hot-swappable processing blade for VS7000 10RU platforms.

VS7000-10RUOPT-PC CEE7-VII European power cord for VS7000 10RU platform. Fits
AC 200-240V single phase platform only.

Common

VS7000-OPT-SFPO-1 GigE optical SFP coupler for VS7000 internal IP router for
VS7000 6RU and 10RU platforms.

VS7000-OPT-SFPO-10 10GigE optical SFP coupler for VS7000 internal IP router for
VS7000 6RU and 10RU platforms.

VS7000-OPT-SFPE-1 GigE copper SFP coupler for VS7000 internal router, RJ45
connection for VS7000 6RU and 10RU platforms.

Spare parts

1RU

VS7000-1RUSPA-ACP Hot-swappable power supply unit for VS7000 1RU platforms.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 297


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Ordering Guide

Table A-36. Ordering references for ViBE VS7000 (...)

Code Description

6RU

NVSPSP60AB Hot-swappable AC power supply unit for VS7000 6RU


platform.

VS7000-6RUSPA-DCP Hot-swappable DC power supply unit for VS7000 6RU


platform.

VS7000-6RUSPA-FAN Hot-swappable fan unit for VS7000 6RU platform.

VS7000-6RUSPA-MGR Hot-swappable chassis manager board for VS7000 6RU


platform.

10RU

NVSPSP10AB Hot-swappable AC power supply unit for VS7000 10RU


platform. Fits all single phase and triple phase platforms.

VS7000-10RUSPA-DCP Hot-swappable DC power supply unit for VS7000 10RU


platform. Fits 48V DC platform only.

VS7000-10RUSPA-FAN Hot-swappable fan unit for VS7000 10RU platform.

VS7000-10RUSPA-MGR Hot-swappable chassis manager board for VS7000 10RU


platform.

Common

NVSGSW01AB Hot-swappable 10GigE internal IP switch for VS7000 6RU and


10RU platforms.

VS7000-SPA-HDD Hot-swappable hard-disk drive for VS7000 1RU, 6RU and


10RU platforms.

Software options

Framework

VS7000-LIC-FRMWORK This option enables the VS7000 MediaFlex video system on


1 server. This license is required for every 1RU platform or
blade in the VS7000 system.

Video Encoding

VS7000-LIC-EQVGAVC This option enables 1 live QVGA video channel encoding


using H.264 baseline & main profiles. It can be used to encode
up to 320x240 @30fps pixels.

VS7000-LIC-ESDAVC This option enables 1 live SD video channel encoding using


H.264 baseline, main & high profiles. It can be used to encode
up to 720x576 pixels@25fps or 720x480@30fps pixels

VS7000-LIC-EFHDAVC This option enables 1 live HD video channel encoding using


H.264 baseline, main & high profiles. It can be used to encode
up to 1920x1080@30fps pixels.

298 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Ordering Guide

Table A-36. Ordering references for ViBE VS7000 (...)

Code Description

VS7000-LIC-ESDMP2 This option enables 1 live SD video channel encoding using


MPEG-2 MP@ML format. It can be used up to 720x576 output
resolution.

VS7000-LIC-EHDMP2 This option enables 1 live HD video channel encoding using


MPEG-2 MP@HL format. It can be used up to 1920x1080
output resolution.

VS7000-LIC-EQVGEVC This option enables 1 live QVGA video channel encoding


using HEVC main profile. It can be used to encode up to
320x240@30fps pixels.

VS7000-LIC-ESDEVC This option enables 1 live SD video channel encoding using


HEVC main profile. It can be used to encode up to
720x576@25fps or 720x480@30fps pixels.

VS7000-LIC-EHDEVC This option enables 1 live broadcast HD video channel


encoding using HEVC main profile. It can be used up to
encode up to 1280x720@30fps pixels.

VS7000-LIC-FLEX This option is valid for one H.264 encoding channel. This
option allows one video encoder (SD/HD) to be assigned
within a pool of encoders that are located on the SAME SITE
and that are sharing the bandwidth in LOCAL statistical
multiplexing.

Processing

VS7000-LIC-SCRAMB This option enables the scrambling for one output profile. It
performs AES-128 encryption.

Audio Encoding

VS7000-LIC-EMP1AAC This option enables 1 live stereo audio channel encoding


using MPEG-1 L2, AAC-LC, HE-AAC V1 or HE-AAC V2 formats.

VS7000-LIC-EAC3MCA This option enables 1 live multichannel audio channel


encoding using AC3 or E-AC3 formats. It can be used to
encode 1 multichannel 5.1 audio or up to 3 stereo audios.

VS7000-LIC-EAACMCA This option enables 1 live multichannel audio channel


encoding AAC. It can be used to encode 1 multichannel 5.1
audio or up to 3 AAC/MPEG-1L2 stereo audios.

VS7000-LIC-ALC This option allows Automatic Loudness Control on one stereo


pair.

VS7000-LIC-ALC51 This option allows Automatic Loudness Control on one


multichannel 5.1 audio.

Video Decoding

VS7000-LIC-DSDAVC This option enables 1 live SD video channel decoding using


MPEG-2 or H.264. It can decode up to 720x576@25fps pixels
or 720x480@30fps pixels.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 299


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Ordering Guide

Table A-36. Ordering references for ViBE VS7000 (...)

Code Description

VS7000-LIC-DHDAVC This option enables 1 live HD video channel decoding using


MPEG-2 or H.264. It can decode up to 1920x1080@30fps
pixels.

VS7000-LIC-DHDCON This option enables 1 live SD/HD video channel decoding


using MPEG-2/H.264 at high bit rates (35Mbps). It can decode
up to 1920x1080 pixels@30fps pixels.

From version 02.20 upwards, H.264 decoding licenses let you decode MPEG-2 or H.264.
In addition, the decoding and encoding licenses now allow operators to use all bought
licenses.
For instance, a 1920x1080@30fps encoding license allows you to encode:
 1 x 1920x1280@30fps
or
 1 x (1280x720) @ 30 fps and 5 x (640x360) @ 30fps

Audio Decoding

VS7000-LIC-DMP1AAC This option enables 1 live audio stereo channel decoding


using MPEG-1 L2, AAC-LC, HE-AAC V1 or HE-AAC V2 formats.

VS7000-LIC-DAC3MCA This option enables 1 multichannel audio decoding using AC3


or E-AC3 formats. It can be used to decode 1 multichannel 5.1
audio or up to 2 stereo audios.

VS7000-LIC-DAACMCA This option enables 1 multichannel audio decoding using


AAC. It can be used to decode 1 multichannel 5.1 AAC audio
or up to 3 stereo AAC/MPEG-1L2 audios.

File Encoding

VS7000-LIC-FILE This option enables file-based encoding on 1 server. It


supports MPEG-2 TS, mp4 input format. It supports MPEG-2
TS, mp4, HLS, Smooth Streaming & MPEG-Dash output
formats.

VS7000-LIC-FILE-SC This option enables the scrambling for file encoding in WebTV
format. It performs AES-128 encryption.

VS7000-LIC-FILE-PR This option enables file-based encoding on 1 server. It


supports MPEG-2 TS format or mp4 file format input. It
supports up to 4k H.264/HEVC encoding over MPEG-2 TS,
mp4, HLS, Smooth Streaming & MPEG-Dash output formats.

300 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Ordering Guide

1RU G8 Hardware available configurations

The following 1-RU platforms may be ordered


 NVSSASP1AB/ NVSSAPP1AB + VS7000-1RUOPT-IP:
Server with 8 IP network connectors

Figure A-1. Server with 8 IP network connectors

Optional additional network


connectors (8 to 5)

Network connectors
4 to 1

 NVSSASP1AB/ NVSSAPP1AB + VS7000-1RUOPT-IP (mandatory) +


VS7000-1RUOPT-4SDI:
Server with 8 IP network connectors and up to 4 SDI -HD inputs

Figure A-2. Server with 8 IP network connectors and up to 4 SDI -HD inputs

HD/SD SDI quad board Optional additional network


IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 connectors (8 to 5)

Network connectors
4 to 1

 NVSSASP1AB/ NVSSAPP1AB + VS7000-1RUOPT-IP (mandatory) +


VS7000-1RUOPT-2SDI:
Server with 8 IP network connectors and up to 2 SDI -HD inputs

Figure A-3. Server with 8 IP network connectors and up to 2 SDI -HD inputs

HD/SD SDI dual board*: Optional additional network


IN2 IN1 connectors (8 to 5)

Network connectors
4 to 1

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 301


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix A ’Technical Specifications’ — Ordering Guide

 NVSSASP1AB/ NVSSAPP1AB + VS7000-1RUOPT-IP (mandatory) +


VS7000-1RUOPT-8SDI
Server with 8 IP network connectors and up to 8 SDI -SD inputs

Figure A-4. Server with 8 IP network connectors and up to 8 SDI -SD inputs

SD SDI octo board Optional additional network


IN1 to IN8 connectors (8 to 5)

Network connectors
4 to 1

 NVSSASP1AB/ NVSSAPP1AB + 2 * VS7000-1RUOPT-8SDI:


Server with 4 IP network connectors and up to 16 SDI -SD inputs

Figure A-5. Server with 4 IP network connectors and up to 16 SDI -SD inputs

SD SDI octo board SD SDI octo board


IN1 to IN8 IN9 to IN16

Network connectors
4 to 1

In this configuration only 2 IP interfaces are available.

302 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
B Appendix
SNMP Management

Introduction
This chapter gives all information required to monitor ViBE VS7000 via
SNMP.
 It gives a description of the ViBE VS7000 MIB.
 It explains how to register the SNMP Manager(s) on the GUI of the
ViBE VS7000.
 It also indicates how to enable the HP Blade Center SNMP Agent.

In this Chapter

’MIB Description’ .........................................................................page 304

’Registering SNMP Manager on the GUI’ ...............................page 309

’Enabling HP Blade Center SNMP Agent’................................page 310

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 303


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix B ’SNMP Management’ — MIB Description

MIB Description
ViBE VS7000 can be monitored via SNMP (v1 or v2). The parameters may
be consulted at any time. You may then check its status and get the lists
of active and closed logs (alarms and events).

Furthermore, SNMP TRAPs are used to send notification of logs of the


equipment. On the CD-ROM provided with ViBE VS7000, you will find a
MIB file in the MIB directory. The MIB details how to monitor the
equipment.

Figure B-1. ViBE VS7000 MIB

The ViBE VS7000 MIB is composed of a number of parts:


 Traps (see Paragraph ’Trap Descriptions’ on page 305 for more
details),
 Objects:
 Description: containing the equipment serial number and
version (these elements are also available in the ViBE About
box).
 Supervision: containing the current status, the active log list and
the closed log list.
 Agent Settings: containing the SNMP agent configuration (Trap
addressee).
 Conformance.

The MIB contains useful information in the description of each field.

The ViBE VS7000 equipment can send notifications to SNMP managers


when the status of the equipment changes (each time an alarm appears
or disappears or an event occurs).

304 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix B ’SNMP Management’ — MIB Description

Trap Descriptions

Table 1. Description of the alarm trap: vs7000Traps(0).supTrapLog(100)

Parameter Description

supLastTrapIdLog Counter that is incremented each time a trap is


sent. Thanks to this counter, you can track the
loss of logs. In the MIB, look at the
supLastTrapIdLog field. If there is a gap
between this value and the supLastTrapIdLog
value received in the last trap, you can deduce
that a trap has been lost. For example, if the
supLastTrapIdLog contained in the last trap
you received is equal to 3 and the
supLastTrapIdLog you get from the MIB is
equal to 4, you can deduce the trap number 4 has
been lost.

supLogId Log identifier. It is a unique ID that remains the


same whether it is an active log or a closed log.

supLogCode Code of the log. This code is used to get the


description of the log.

supLogType Type of the log. This code is used to get the type
of the log (event, alarm).

supLogNodeId Node identifier of the associated log.

supLogRaisingDateMs UTC time of the log in milliseconds from


1/1/1970.

supLogClearingDateMs UTC time of the log ending in milliseconds from


1/1/1970. It is equal to zero if the log appears.

supLogJobId Job identifier. It is equal to zero if system log.

supLogJobName Job name.Significant if supLogJobId is not


equal to zero.

supLogJobRaisingDate Optional, can be significant only for file-to-file


jobs (off-line jobs). Time in milliseconds from the
beginning of the file.

supLogJobClearingDate Optional, can be significant only for file-to-file


jobs (off-line jobs). Time in milliseconds from the
beginning of the file.

supLogSeverity Log severity.

supLogCategory Log category.

supLogProbableCause Log probable cause.

supLogProbableCauseText Log probable cause text.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 305


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix B ’SNMP Management’ — MIB Description

Table 1. Description of the alarm trap: vs7000Traps(0).supTrapLog(100)

Parameter Description

supLogSpecificProblem Specific problem text (can be empty).

supLogXMLResource Optional XML resource (format is described by


resource.xsd file).

supLogNbParam Number of log parameters.

supLogParam1 Parameter 1.

supLogParam2 Parameter 2.

supLogParam3 Parameter 3.

supLogParam4 Parameter 4.

supLogParam5 Parameter 5.

supLogParam6 Parameter 6.

supLogParam7 Parameter 7.

supLogParam8 Parameter 8.

supLogParam9 Parameter 9.

supLogParam10 Parameter 10.

306 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix B ’SNMP Management’ — MIB Description

Register/Unregister a Manager to Receive Traps


Figure B-2. MIB trap addressee table

To register or unregister a trap receiver, add or remove the


agtStgTrDstTable table lines. For example:
 To add an snmpV2 trap receiver with the 178.3.2.10 IP address:

SET agtStgTrDstEvalRowStatus.178.3.2.10 integer 4 (Create and


go)

SET agtStgTrDstSnmpVersion.178.3.2.10 integer 2 (snmp v2)


 To add a snmpV1 trap receiver with the 178.3.2.20 IP address:

SET agtStgTrDstEvalRowStatus.178.3.2.20 integer 4 (Create and


go)

SET agtStgTrDstSnmpVersion.178.3.2.20 integer 1 (snmp v1)


 To remove a trap receiver with the 178.3.2.10 IP address:

SET agtStgTrDstEvalRowStatus.178.3.2.10 integer 6 (Remove)

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 307


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix B ’SNMP Management’ — MIB Description

Get the Active Log List or Closed Log List


Figure B-3. MIB log list and closed log list

To retrieve the active log list or the closed log list, walk either the
supActiveLogTable or the supClosedLogTable. For example:
 To retrieve the active log list:

WALK supActiveLogTable
 To retrieve the closed log list:

WALK supClosedLogTable

Each time a change occurs in one of these two lists, the supLogVersion
variable is updated. To find out if there has been a change in one list:

GET supLogVersion.0

If the result value is not the same as the previous one, a change has
occurred.

308 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix B ’SNMP Management’ — Registering SNMP Manager on the GUI

Registering SNMP Manager on the GUI


To register a Manager to receive the traps, proceed as follows:
1. Open the GUI as described in Section ’Reaching the GUI’ on page 38.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Select the SNMP category.
4. Click the Edit button on the top-right corner to be able to modify the
values.
5. Fill in the Read Community and Read/Write Community fields.

By default, two community strings are declared:


 public associated with R/O access level
 private associated with R/W access level

6. In the table, add the IP addresses of the SNMP Managers so that they
can receive the traps.

To know how to use a table, see Paragraph ’Tables’ on page 41.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 309


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix B ’SNMP Management’ — Enabling HP Blade Center SNMP Agent

Enabling HP Blade Center SNMP Agent


In addition to the ViBE VS7000 SNMP agent, the HP blade center
provides an SNMP agent that can be used to monitor the hardware.

To use it, you need to enable SNMP and to set a number of parameters.

This configuration is made through the HP configuration interface of the


device. Proceed as follows:
1. Open the HP configuration interface, as explained in Section
’Connecting to the HP Monitoring Tools’ on page 256.
2. From the tree menu on the left, under Enclosure Information, select
Enclosure Settings and then SNMP Settings.
3. Check the Enable SNMP box.
4. Fill in the System Location, System Contact, Read Community and
Write Community fields.
5. In the Community String field, enter the IP addresses of the SNMP
Managers so that they can receive the system alerts and click Add.
6. Repeat this step for each trap addressee to add.

For further details on SNMP management of the HP blade center, refer to


the HP documentation.

310 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
CAppendix
Safety Instructions

The safety instructions, provided by HP, are available in printed format in


your equipment packaging.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 311


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix C ’Safety Instructions’

BLANK PAGE

312 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
D
Appendix
Regulatory Notices

Refer to the documentation provided by HP in your equipment


packaging.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 313


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix D ’Regulatory Notices’

BLANK PAGE

314 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix E
Logs

Introduction
This chapter provides the list of logs visible in the Logs panel.

In this Chapter

’Log Categories’...........................................................................page 316

’List of Logs’ .................................................................................page 317

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 315


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix E ’Logs’ — Log Categories

Log Categories
A category is indicated for each log. This may be:
 Communications
 Quality of service
 Processing error
 Equipment
 Environmental
 Other

316 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix E ’Logs’ — List of Logs

List of Logs

Code Type Level Text

0 Alarm Critical Instantiation error RTSP server %s

1 Alarm Undefined Node in maintenance

2 Alarm Undefined Unreachable node

3 Alarm Major Bitrate overflow: LAN overload (%d bps used instead of %d
bps)

4 Event Major Job deleted incompatible with configuration

5 Event Undefined Log database purged by %s

6 Event Undefined Log database exported by %s to %s

7 Event Minor Log database export failure by %s to %s, cause %s

8 Event Minor Log database purge failure by %s, cause %s

9 Event Undefined Workflow operation %s %s by %s

10 Event Undefined Job operation %s by %s

11 Alarm Undefined File error: Could not open file %s on folder %s

12 Alarm Critical Loss of TS synchro

13 Alarm Undefined Unreachable destination: Network storage %s on server


%s protocol %s

14 Alarm Undefined Master node

15 Event Undefined Master change previous master node %d, cause %s

16 Alarm Undefined Main disk

17 Event Undefined Main disk change previous disk node %d, cause %s

18 Event Undefined License file download

19 Event Undefined License expiration %s

20 Event Undefined Version download version %s, actual version %s

21 Event Undefined Version activation version %s, actual version %s

22 Alarm Warning No source clock available: %s

23 Event Undefined Configuration change System parameters %s by %s

24 Alarm Major Output overflow

25 Alarm Undefined Active input %s

26 Event Undefined Active input switch %s is active

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 317


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix E ’Logs’ — List of Logs

27 Alarm Critical Configuration inconsistency: received video format (%s)


higher than configured maximum one (%s)

28 Alarm Minor Stream discontinuity: continuity counter error on PID %d

29 Alarm Major No component: %s

30 Alarm Major No component: %s

31 Alarm Critical Configuration inconsistency: audio sampling rate (%d Hz)


should be in the range [%d-%d] for %s encoding at %d bps

32 Event Critical Software error: workflow %s has been modified without


update of its version number

33 Alarm Critical Configuration inconsistency: TS bitrate is higher than


configured maximum one (%s bps)

34 Alarm Critical Configuration inconsistency: number of audio channels


(%d) is higher than configured maximum one (%d)

35 Alarm Critical Configuration inconsistency: format %s is not the


configured one (%s)

36 Alarm Warning Job is waiting: %s

37 Alarm Minor Configuration inconsistency: %s is out of the picture


boundaries

38 Alarm Undefined File error: format not supported

39 Event Undefined Job is running on node(s) %s

40 Event Undefined Job deletion from node(s) %s

41 Alarm Major No component: PID %d not referenced in program %d

42 Alarm Major No component: PID %d missing

43 Alarm Major Unsupported frame format: %s

44 Alarm Critical Configuration inconsistency: audio format %s is not


compatible with %s encoding

45 Alarm Warning Version mismatch: a new %s version is required, please


reboot the node to activate it

46 Alarm Undefined Loss of synchronisation: %s

47 Alarm Undefined Loss of synchronisation: %s

48 Alarm Undefined Connection establishment error

49 Alarm Major ServiceId not present: %d in PAT

50 Alarm Warning No component: program number %d, %s

51 Event Undefined Job restarted detection of new input component(s)

52 Alarm Undefined File error: cannot write file %s on folder %s

53 Event Warning File error: output file renamed %s (file %s already exists)

318 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix E ’Logs’ — List of Logs

54 Event Major File error: cannot rename output file %s into %s on folder
%s

55 Alarm Undefined File error: cannot create output file %s on folder %s

56 Event Major Unreachable network storage: %s

57 Alarm Major Input overflow

58 Alarm Minor No AFD in signal

59 Alarm Minor No WSS in signal

60 Alarm Minor Configuration inconsistency: PCR PID is not defined for


output program %d

61 Alarm Major Link down: interface %d

62 Alarm Major Configuration inconsistency: PMT PID %d is not the


configured one (%d)

63 Alarm Warning Link down: %s NIC of interface %d

64 Event Undefined Job completed

65 Alarm Critical Configuration inconsistency: audio bitrate (%d bps) should


be in the range [%d-%d] for %s encoding

66 Alarm Warning Job modification is waiting: %s

67 Alarm Major No component: Track Id %d missing

68 Alarm Major Component processing problem: unsupported format (%s)

69 Alarm Minor Fallback mode: component %s uses fallback bitrate (%d


bps)

70 Alarm Minor Configuration inconsistency: configured component


bitrate range [%d-%d] should be in the range [%d-%d] for
PID %d

71 Alarm Warning Software error: database incorrect version (%s)

72 Alarm Warning Software error: current software version integrity is not


verified (%s)

73 Alarm Major Output overflow: %s

1000 Event Undefined ECM channel crypto period period %d s, channel %d,
stream %d

1001 Alarm Warning Scrambling in degraded mode: ECM channel extended


crypto period for channel %d, stream %d

1002 Alarm Warning Connection establishment error

1003 Alarm Warning Communications protocol error: %s

1004 Alarm Warning Scrambling error: %s (stream could not be decrypted)

2000 Alarm Critical Hardware failure: %s

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 319


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix E ’Logs’ — List of Logs

2001 Alarm Critical Ventilation failure: %s

2002 Alarm Undefined High temperature: %s

2003 Alarm Critical Power supply failure: %s

2004 Alarm Critical Hardware failure: %s

2005 Alarm Critical Disk failure: %s

2006 Alarm Critical Hardware failure: accessing problem

3000 Alarm Critical Connection establishment error

3001 Alarm Critical Communications protocol error: %s

3002 Alarm Critical Connection establishment error: %s

4000 Event Critical Hot folder job operation error %s by %s: %s

5000 Alarm Major Component processing problem: %s

5001 Alarm Major Configuration inconsistency: %s

5002 Event Critical Erroneous workflow version description of workflow %s


has been modified but not its version %s

6000 Alarm Undefined Simulation running %s by %s

7000 Event Undefined Recovery point operation %s %s by ’%s’

7001 Event Warning Recovery point operation error %s %s by ’%s’

7002 Alarm Warning Recovery point operation error periodic, recovery point
cannot be generated

7003 Alarm Warning Recovery point operation %s restoration in progress

 Event type log: Log raised and cleared immediately allowing an


event to be monitored.
 Undefined level: The level will be determined according to the
context.

320 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
F Appendix
Network Settings (6RU and 10RU Devices)

Introduction
This chapter provides detailed information on the network configuration
for 6RU and 10RU devices.

It also contains a list of HP documents to which you can refer for more
information on the blade centers.

In this Chapter

’Blades’..........................................................................................page 322

’Internal Switches & Software Configuration Consistency’..page 324

’Flex10’ ..........................................................................................page 325

’Multicast Management’.............................................................page 328

’Multiple Blade Center Configuration’ .....................................page 329

’Interface Bitrates’ .......................................................................page 331

’HP Documentation’ ....................................................................page 332

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 321


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix F ’Network Settings (6RU and 10RU Devices)’ — Blades

Blades

Internal Switches (Flex10)


Each blade has two physical 10 Gbps interfaces, also called pNIC. The use
of Flex10 modules, i.e. the internal switches of the blade center, allows to
demultiply these interfaces to reach a number of 8 interfaces, or FlexNIC:
4 by physical interface.

The allocation of the 10 Gbps of a physical interface between the


4 FlexNIC is customizable. To make this bitrate allocation, you must use
the HP interface to configure the Flex10:
 10RU device: one physical interface is on the first Flex10, the other is
on the second Flex10.
 6RU device: both physical interfaces are on the first Flex10. We add a
mezzanine to the blade so as to have also two physical interfaces on
the second Flex10. In total, there are consequently 16 FlexNIC.

To know how to use the HP interface, refer to the HP Virtual Connect for
c-Class BladeSystem - User Guide provided on the CD-ROM.

Interface Bonding
Interfaces are grouped in bonds, in fail-over mode, with the main
interface always being on the first Flex10.

The currently active NIC remains active while it is up, there is no


automatic restore when the other NIC becomes up again.

10RU Device
Each blade has 8 network interfaces. On the Flex10, they are named
LOM:1-a to LOM:4-a and LOM:1-b to LOM:4-b; a blades being on the first
Flex10 and b blades on the second one.

On the 10RU device, interfaces are defined as follows:


 Interface 1: LOM:1-a & LOM:2-a
 Interface 2: LOM:1-b & LOM:2-b
 Interface 3: LOM:1-c & LOM:2-c
 Interface 4: LOM:1-d & LOM:2-d

322 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix F ’Network Settings (6RU and 10RU Devices)’ — Blades

6RU Device
Each blade has 16 network interfaces. On the Flex10, they are named
LOM:1-a to LOM:8-a and LOM:1-b to LOM:8-b; a blades being on the first
Flex10 and b blades on the second one.

On the 6RU device, associations between interfaces in the software


application and the FlexNIC in the Flex10 are defined as follows:
 Interface 1: LOM:1-a & MEZZ1:1-a
 Interface 2: LOM:2-a & MEZZ1:2-a
 Interface 3: LOM:1-b & MEZZ1:1-b
 Interface 4: LOM:2-b & MEZZ1:2-b
 Interface 5: LOM:1-c & MEZZ1:1-c
 Interface 6: LOM:2-c & MEZZ1:2-c
 Interface 7: LOM:1-d & MEZZ1:1-d
 Interface 8: LOM:2-d & MEZZ1:2-d

VLAN Tagging
When using VLAN tagging to have more than four interfaces in total in
the 10RU device, or eight interfaces in total in the 6RU device, it is
imperative that the configuration be consistent with the Flex10
configuration.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 323


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix F ’Network Settings (6RU and 10RU Devices)’ — Internal Switches & Software

Internal Switches & Software Configuration Consistency


The configuration of the blade internal switches (Flex10) must be
consistent with the network configuration in the software application

Here are the main configuration principles:


 Interfaces 1 are reserved to the system network of the blade center, for
management.
 In the software application, it is possible to define networks of internal
data and external data.
 On the Flex10:
 A private network forbids the dialog between two blades of the
blade center.
 Internal data networks and the System network must never be
set as private network.
 External data networks must be set as private networks. For
example in an IP TV configuration in which blades generate
multicast, this prevents the multicast from affecting the blades.
Otherwise, if an external data network is not set as a private
network, as long as no client has sent an IGMP request to
receive the stream, the network is flooded by the Flex10 on all
interfaces.

324 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix F ’Network Settings (6RU and 10RU Devices)’ — Flex10

Flex10

External Connector Description

FLEX10
 X2 to X6, used with SFP couplers, can be Gbps copper/optical
interfaces or 10 Gbps optical interfaces.
 X1 can be used:
 The same way as X2-X6.
or
 As a link between several blades, via a specific stacking cable.
 X7 and X8 can be used:
 As an internal link between the 2 Flex10 of the blade center. For
ViBE VS7000 needs, at least one connector (X7 or X8) must be
used this way.
or
 The same way as X2-X6.

FLEX10-D
 X1 to X10, used with SFP couplers, can be Gbps copper/optical
interfaces or 10 Gbps optical interfaces. X1 can also be used as a link
between several blades (stacking feature).

Grouping Possibilities
It is possible to group:
 several LANs on one unique external connector. To do so, you must
create a Shared uplink set using VLAN tagging.
 several external connectors on one unique LAN (trunk): this lets you
increase the bandwidth.

For more information on these aspects, refer to the HP Virtual


Connect - Ethernet Networking Scenario Cookbook.

Flex10 Configuration
On the CD-ROM, you will find a folder named Flex10. This folder contains
configuration files for the Flex10 modules.

The format of these files is CLI.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 325


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix F ’Network Settings (6RU and 10RU Devices)’ — Flex10

How to Use a Configuration File


1. Open an SSH session with the active Flex10 (for such a session, you
can use for example the free tool "putty").
Login and password are required to establish the connection.
2. When the SSH session is established, open the configuration file with
MS Wordpad.
3. Copy all the content of the configuration file (using CTRL-A then
CTRL-C, for example), and copy it into the SSH session.
4. Check that all the instructions are correctly executed (reports are given
on the SSH session).

The configuration file is also applied to the other Flex10 of the


enclosure.

Description of Configuration Files

Factory Configuration Files


 Factory_config_Flex10_C3000_10.txt
 Factory_config_Flex10_C3000_10D.txt
 Factory_config_Flex10_C7000_10.txt
 Factory_config_Flex10_C7000_10D.txt

When you received your VS7000, the Flex10 was configured with a
default configuration.

The configuration files listed above contain this factory configuration.

There is two files for the HP C3000 enclosure and for the HP C7000
enclosure depending on flex10 type (Flex10 or Flex10D).

Files to Help You Apply your Own Configuration


 First_part_config_Flex10_CX000.txt
 Last_part_config_Flex10_CX000.txt

When you want to configure the Flex10, it can be easier to reset the
configuration at first and then build your own configuration.

These files will help you do this.

The steps are:

Preliminary: you shall know exactly the network topology you want to
apply:
 Which Shared Uplink Sets (SUS)?

326 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix F ’Network Settings (6RU and 10RU Devices)’ — Flex10

 Which LANs? Using VLAN tagging?


 Which connectors on the Flex10 panel, for which usage?
 Which blade interfaces, for which LANs? Using VLAN tagging?

Step 1: Reset the Flex10 configuration. To do this, open an SSH session


to the active Flex10, and enter successively the following commands:
 poweroff server *
 remove profile *
 delete domain
 import enclosure UserName=Administrator Password=xxxxxxx
(replace xxxxxxx by the password of the on-board administrator).

Step 2: Apply the first part configuration file (use either C7000 or C3000
one, depending on your enclosure). This step automatically:
 Creates the 2 LANs that are absolutely necessary to the VS7000:
System private LAN, and Internal data LAN.
 Creates a server profile that contains only these 2 LANs.
 Applies this server profile to the first blade of the enclosure.

Step 3: Open the Web interface on the Flex10, and perform the following
actions:
1. Create the Shared Uplink Sets (SUS) you need.
2. Create the LANs you need: Control, data, etc.

A LAN can be associated to an SUS at creation, but not after.

3. Do not forget to configure correctly the external LANs: SmartLink and


Private Network feature shall be activated, and a LAN shall be
accessible by a blade on both NICs of a bond.
4. Edit the server profile, and configure it with the LANs you created.

Step 4: Apply the last part configuration file. This step automatically:
 Creates new profiles identical to the first profile.
 Assigns these profiles to the other blades of the enclosure.

As usual, when the configuration is finished, save it carefully in a file (you


can use the "show config" command).

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 327


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix F ’Network Settings (6RU and 10RU Devices)’ — Multicast Management

Multicast Management
IGMP snooping is enabled on the two Flex10, with the default time-out of
260 seconds.

IGMP snooping must not be disabled as it is mandatory on the


Internal data network. If disabled, the system will not be operational.

To ensure a proper multicast management, the network must contain an


IGMP Querier. You must thus ensure that one of your switches acts as
such (the Flex10 cannot have this role).

External LANs are configured as private networks, which forbids any


traffic between blades. In an IP TV environment, this prevents from
flooding a multicast stream in output of a blade towards all the other
blades.

328 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix F ’Network Settings (6RU and 10RU Devices)’ — Multiple Blade Center

Multiple Blade Center Configuration


It is possible to create groups of four 10RU blade centers.

Figure F-1. Stacking of multiple blade centers1

Table 1. Caption of the stacking of multiple blade centers figure

Item Description

1 10 Gb Uplink

2 Switch Cross Connect

3 Enclosure 1

4 Enclosure 2

5 Enclosure 3

6 Enclosure 4

7 External 10Gb Stacking link

8 10 Gb Uplink

9 Internal Dual 10Gb Stacking links

On Flex10D, the specific stacking link (External 10 Gb Stacking link) do


not exist anymore. A classic cable can be used instead, to link connector
X1 of the Flex10D.

1. The diagram and the associated caption originate from the HP Virtual Connect Cookbook (see full

reference in Section ’HP Documentation’ on page 332).

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 329


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix F ’Network Settings (6RU and 10RU Devices)’ — Multiple Blade Center

If there are more than four 10RU blade centers, or several 6RU blade
centers, they must be linked via an external switch, at least considering
the system private LAN.

An internal data LAN must not be shared on several blade centers: each
blade center must have its own internal data LAN.

330 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix F ’Network Settings (6RU and 10RU Devices)’ — Interface Bitrates

Interface Bitrates
You may adjust the bitrates for the interfaces.

Bitrate Allocation on 10RU Interfaces


You may adjust the bitrates of the four interfaces, for a total of 10 Gb/s.

The factory configuration is as follows:


 Interface 1: 2 Gb/s
 Interface 2: 3 Gb/s
 Interface 3: 1 Gb/s
 Interface 4: 4 Gb/s

Bitrate Allocation on 6RU Interfaces


You may adjust the bitrates of the eight interfaces, for a total of 20 Gb/s.

The factory configuration is as follows:


 Interface 1: 2 Gb/s
 Interface 2: 3 Gb/s
 Interface 3: 1 Gb/s
 Interface 4: 2.4 Gb/s
 Interface 5: 3.5 Gb/s
 Interface 6: 2.3 Gb/s
 Interface 7: 3.5 Gb/s
 Interface 8: 2.3 Gb/s

Bitrate Allocation Rules


You can allocate these bitrates differently provided you respect the
following principles:
 Avoid reducing the System private LAN bitrate as it has a primary role
in the blade center’s proper functioning.
 If the Internal data bitrate is too much reduced, this creates additional
restrictions for the load-balancer. The blade center risks being
under-used, or it will be impossible to create some jobs that need to
be allocated on several nodes.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 331


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix F ’Network Settings (6RU and 10RU Devices)’ — HP Documentation

HP Documentation
HP provides a number of documents for their blade centers. These
documents are available on the HP Web site, but you can also find them
on the CD-ROM delivered with your ViBE VS7000 system:
 HP BladeSystem c7000 Enclosure - Setup and Installation Guide
 HP BladeSystem c3000 Enclosure - Setup and Installation Guide
 HP Troubleshooting Guide
 HP Virtual Connect - Ethernet Networking Scenario Cookbook
 BladeSystem for ProLiant Release Set Compatibility Table
 HP BladeSystem Onboard Administrator - User Guide
 HP Virtual Connect for c-Class BladeSystem - Setup and Installation
Guide
 HP Virtual Connect for c-Class BladeSystem - User Guide
 HP Virtual Connect Manager Command Line Interface for c-Class
BladeSystem - User Guide
 HP BladeSystem c3000 Enclosure Quick Specs
 HP BladeSystem c7000 Enclosure Quick Specs
 HP Proliant BL460c G7 Quick Specs
 HP Proliant DL360 G7 Quick Specs
 HP Proliant BL460c G8 Quick Specs
 HP Proliant DL360p G8 Quick Specs

332 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
G Appendix
Network Settings (1RU Devices)

Introduction
This chapter provides detailed information on the network configuration
for 1RU devices.

In this Chapter

’Network Configuration’ .............................................................page 334

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 333


User Manual - Edition M
Appendix G ’Network Settings (1RU Devices)’ — Network Configuration

Network Configuration
On 1RU devices, the network configuration is as follows:
 Interface 1: LAN 10, System private LAN.
 Interface 2: LAN 20, Management LAN.
 Interface 3: LAN 30, Data LAN.
 Interface 4: LAN 40, Data LAN.
 Additional LANs, with VLAN tagging, are available: VLAN 11 (resp. 21,
31, 41) on interface 1 (resp. 2, 3, 4).

For a VS7000 made of several 1RU server, it is possible to add an Internal


data network if you need to start jobs that can be split over several nodes.
It is also necessary for a statmux that is split over several nodes.

If there are 2 network boards on the server, then each interface is


composed of 2 NICs that work in fail-over (bond). Interface 1 is
composed of the first NIC of each board, Interface 2 is composed of the
second NIC of each board, etc. NICs are grouped in bonds, in fail-over
mode.

When there are 2 octo SDI boards, there is only one network board. In
this case, Interface 1 is composed of the first two NICs and Interface 2 is
composed of the last 2 NICs.

The currently active NIC remains active while it is up, there is no


automatic restore when the other NIC becomes up again.

334 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Glossary

100/1000Base-T An Ethernet standard designed to generate, monitor and capture 100/1000


Ethernet traffic.

API Application Programming Interface


Specification intended to be used as an interface by software components
to communicate with each other.

ASI Asynchronous Serial Interface.

Buffer A memory store used to provide a consistent rate of data flow.

BW Bandwidth: a measure of the width of a range of frequencies, measured in


hertz.

CBR Constant Bitrate. The bit-rate of the bitstream is constant.

Codec Compressor-Decompressor.
A codec is a device or computer program capable of encoding and/or
decoding a digital data stream or signal.

Compression The process of removing redundant data from audio or video streams to
reduce the amount of data transferred or stored.

CPU Central Processing Unit.

DAR Display Aspect Ratio

DASH Dynamic Adaptive Streaming over HTTP

Decoder The device containing the electronic circuitry necessary to decode


encrypted signals. Some Decoders features a receiver.

DNS Domain Name Server

DRC Dynamic Range Control.

DVB Digital Video Broadcasting


The Digital Video Broadcasting Project (DVB) is an industry-led consortium
of around 250 broadcasters, manufacturers, network operators, software
developers, regulatory bodies and others in over 35 countries committed
to designing open technical standards for the global delivery of digital
television and data services. Services using DVB standards are available
on every continent with more than 500 million DVB receivers deployed.

EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility.

Ethernet The most widely used local area network (LAN) defined by the IEEE as the
802.3 standard.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 335


User Manual - Edition M
Glossary

Field For an interlaced video signal, a "field" is the assembly of alternate lines of
a frame. Therefore, an interlaced frame is composed of two fields, a top
field and a bottom field.

Frame A frame contains lines of spatial information of a video signal. For


progressive video, these lines contain samples starting from one time
instant and continuing through successive lines to the bottom of the
frame. For interlaced video a frame consists of two fields, a top field and a
bottom field. One of these fields will commence one field later than the
other.

FTP File Transfer Protocol.


It is a standard network protocol used to copy a file from one host to
another over a TCP-based network.

GPI General Purpose Interface.

GUI Graphical User Interface


It is a type of user interface that allows users to interact with electronic
devices with images rather than text commands. A GUI represents the
information and actions available to a user through graphical icons and
visual indicators such as secondary notation, as opposed to text-based
interfaces, typed command labels or text navigation.

HbbTV Hybrid Broadcast Broadband TV


Both an industry standard and promotional initiative for hybrid digital TV
to harmonize the broadcast, IPTV, and broadband delivery of
entertainment to the end consumer through connected TVs (Smart TVs)
and set-top boxes.

HD High Definition.

HD-SDI 1.5 Gbps High-Definition Serial Digital Interface.

HDTV High Definition Television.

HTML Hyper Text Markup Language.


HTML is the predominant markup language for web pages. That is the
basic building-blocks of web pages.

HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol.

IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol.


IGMP is a communication protocol used by hosts and adjacent routers on
IP networks to establish multicast group memberships.
There are three versions of IGMP, as defined by "Request for Comments"
(RFC) documents of the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IGMPv1 is
defined by RFC 1112, IGMPv2 is defined by RFC 2236 and IGMPv3 was
initially defined by RFC 3376 but has since been superseded by RFC 4604.

IIS Internet Information Services.


Web server application and set of feature extension modules created by
Microsoft for use with Microsoft Windows. IIS 7.5 supports HTTP, HTTPS,
FTP, FTPS, SMTP and NNTP.

IP Internet Protocol.

IP Address A 32-bit (IPv4) or 128-bit (IPv6) numerical identifier for a specific TCP/IP
host device on a network, that represents the sender or receiver of
information sent across the network.

336 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Glossary

IRD Integrated Receiver Decoder.


The IRD is the official name for the satellite receiver, which has a built-in
decoder for unscrambling subscription channels. It is also known as
Set-Top Box for the cable.

ISO International Standards Organization.

ITU-R International Telecommunications Union - Radio.


Formerly CCIR. Deals with the standardization of wireless communication.

ITU-T International Telecommunications Union - Telecommunications.


Formerly CCITT. Produces global telecommunication standards, and
defines tariff and accounting principles.

JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group.


Name of the committee that created the JPEG standard (and also other
standards). The JPEG standard specifies the codec, which defines how a
still image is compressed into a stream of bytes and decompressed back
into an image.

LAN Local Area Network.


A local area network is a network that connects computers and devices in
a limited geographical area such as home, school, computer laboratory or
office building.

LED Light Emitting Diode.

LFE Low Frequency Effects

LUFS Loudness Unit relative to Full Scale

MIB Management Information Base.


SNMP collects management information from devices on the network and
records the information in a management information base. The MIB
information includes device features, data throughput statistics, traffic
overloads, and errors.

MPTS Multiple Programs Transport Stream

MTU Maximum Transmission Unit: The size of the largest packet that a network
protocol can transmit.

Multicast Process where a single stream is served from one source to multiple
receivers. The multicast address range is: 224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255.

NMS Network Management System.

NTP Network Time Protocol.

Packet - In networks, a unit of data transmitted over a packet-switching network.


A packet consists of a header followed by a number of contiguous bytes
from an elementary data stream.
- In transport streams, a packet is a small, fixed-size data quantum.

PAFF Picture-Adaptive Frame/Field


A coding feature lets the encoder choose between encoding an interlaced
picture as a single frame or as two separate fields.

PSU Power Supply Unit.

R, G, B Red, Green, Blue.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 337


User Manual - Edition M
Glossary

Resolution Determined by the number of pixels displayed per line or for a given area.

RTP Real Time Transport Protocol.


This Protocol defines a standardized packet format for delivering audio
and video over IP networks.

RU Rack Unit. It is a unit of measure used to describe the height of equipment


intended for mounting in a 19-inch rack or a 23-inch rack. One rack unit is
1.75 inches (44.45 mm) high.

SD Standard Definition.

SD-SDI 270 Mbps Standard-Definition Serial Digital Interface.

SDI Serial Digital Interface.

SDTV Simple Definition Television.

SID Slide-out System Insight Display.


Active Health Indicator provided by HP on the front panel of their 1RU
server to indicate equipment status.

SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers.


A Standards Organization devoted to advancing theory and application in
motion imaging, including film, television, video, computer imaging, and
telecommunications.

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol.


SNMP provides a means to monitor and control network devices, and to
manage configurations, statistics collection, performance, and security.
SNMP network management is based on the client and server model. Each
managed host runs a process called an agent. The agent is a server
process that maintains the Management Information Base (MIB) database
for the host. SNMP uses ports 161 and 162.

SPTS Single Program Transport Stream

TCP Transmission Control Protocol.


One of the main protocols in TCP/IP networks. TCP enables two hosts to
establish a connection and exchange streams of data. TCP guarantees
delivery of data and packets, and will be delivered in the same order in
which they were sent. While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery
of the data, TCP takes care of keeping track of the individual units of data
(called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing through
the Internet.

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol


Two interrelated protocols that are part of the Internet protocol suite. TCP
operates on the OSI transport layer and breaks data into packets. IP
operates on the OSI network layer and routes the packets. While IP takes
care of handling the actual delivery of the data, TCP takes care of keeping
track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is
divided into for efficient routing through the Internet. TCP/IP allows the
construction of very large networks with little central management.

TS Transport Stream.
A multiplex of several Elementary Stream that are contained in packets.

338 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Glossary

UDP User Data Protocol.


A connectionless protocol, like TCP, that runs on top of IP networks. Unlike
TCP/IP, UDP/IP provides very few error recovery services, offering instead
a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network without
acknowledgements for guaranteed delivery.

Unicast Unicast is communication between a single sender and a single receiver


over a network.

UTC Coordinated Universal Time.


UTC is the time standard by which the world regulates clocks and time. In
casual use, UTC corresponds to Greenwich Mean Time (or GMT).

VBI Vertical Blanking Interval.


In analog video, the interval after the last displayed line of video in a field
and before the first displayed line of video in the next field, during which
a television receiver will synchronize vertically.

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 339


User Manual - Edition M
Glossary

BLANK PAGE

340 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Index

A F
AC Mains power supply cord(s) ...............29 File
Account Encoding ....................................... 60, 300
Default GUI account ...............................38 Formats ............................................... 281
User account configuration ...................81 HLS file output ..................................... 187
MP4 file output .................................... 201
Audio MPEG-DASH file output ...................... 200
Audio/video extraction ........................138 Output specifications .......................... 290
Decoding ..............................147, 282, 300 TS file input ......................................... 137
Delay ....................................................151 TS file output ....................................... 180
Encoding ......................161, 163, 284, 299 Front panel ............................................... 21
Loudness control .................................148
Mixing ..................................................147
Multi audio ...................................289, 291
Processing ...................................152, 283
Resampling ..........................................151
H
Supported formats ..............................280
TS audio/video packetizing ..................173 HbbTV ..................... 197, 200, 290, 292, 336
HLS
File output ........................................... 187
Output ................................................. 181
C Sample workflow .................................. 49
Specifications ...................................... 289
Cabling ......................................................29 Hot folder
Definition ............................................... 78
GUI description ..................................... 78
D Tutorial .................................................. 63

Date
Configuration ...................................36, 80 I
Display in the GUI ..........................39, 128
Log clearing .........................................126 IGMP ....................................................... 137
Log raising ...........................................126 Definition ............................................. 336
Decoding Snooping ............................................. 328
Audio ...................................147, 282, 300 Version configuration ............................ 76
Video ............................................282, 299 Input
DNS ...........................................75, 256, 335 SDI ....................................................... 141
DRM 184, 189, 192, 196, 198, 200, 289, 291 TS file .................................................. 137
see also Scrambling TS over IP ............................................ 136
Installation procedure .............................. 28
Interlaced ................................................ 337
E IP ............................................... 38, 253, 254

Encoding
Audio ...........................161, 163, 284, 299
Video ....................162, 164, 168, 287, 298
J
Java
Requirements ........................................ 38

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 341


User Manual - Edition M
Index

Job O
Creation ...........................................42, 91
Creation from a sample workflow .........46 Output
Parameters ............................................44
States ...................................................107 HLS ......................................................181
Tab description ....................................105 HLS file ................................................187
MP4 file ................................................201
MPEG-DASH ........................................197
MPEG-DASH file ..................................200
L RTMP ...................................................180
Smooth streaming ...............................190
LAN TS file ..................................................180
TS over IP streamer .............................175
Configuration .................................74, 262
System private LAN configuration 76, 255
License
Declaration ..........................................228 P
Download ..............................................83
List .........................................................83 Password
Management .........................................82 GUI default password ................ 33, 35, 38
New option ..........................................229 ILO interface password ........ 216, 231, 232
Request ..........................................89, 227 Modification ..........................................81
Live Power up ..................................................32
Inputs specifications ............................280 Protective ground .....................................29
Outputs specifications .........................288
Login
GUI default login .......................33, 35, 38
Logo R
Insertion ...............................................152
Supported image file formats .............281 Rear panel ................................................23
Logs Recovery Points
Categories ............................................316 Add ........................................................85
Configuration .........................................85 Delete ....................................................85
Export ............................................85, 241 List .........................................................83
Filtering and sorting ............................126 Management .........................................82
List .......................................................317 Restore ..................................................85
Panel ..............................................39, 126

S
M
Scrambling ............................. 289, 291, 299
Matrix see also DRM
see SDI system with a matrix SDI
MIB description ......................................304 GUI description ......................................89
MP4 Input item ............................................141
File output ............................................201 Inputs naming .......................................64
Inputs specifications ............................280
MPEG-DASH System with a matrix ............................65
File output ............................................200 Tutorial ..................................................64
Live output ...........................................197 Workflow example ................................64
Specifications ..............................290, 292 SIG Editor
Operation .............................................252
Simulation
N Create ..................................................113
Export ..................................................122
NTP Import ..................................................123
Definition .............................................337 Job simulation and status ...................117
Synchronization configuration ........36, 81 Status ...................................................117

342 ViBE VS7000 v03.01


User Manual - Edition M
Index

Smooth streaming U
Output ..................................................190
Sample workflow .............................52, 54 User account
Specifications ......................................289
Configuration ........................................ 81
SNMP
Configuration .........................................80
Definition .............................................338
HP blade center SNMP agent ..............310 V
Management ........................................303
Software version Ventilation ................................................ 29
Management ..........................................82 Video
Manual covering ....................................11 Audio/video extraction ........................ 138
Specifications Decoding ..................................... 282, 299
Electrical and Thermal .........................266 Encoding ............. 162, 164, 168, 287, 298
Standard compliance ..............................294 Processing ........................................... 283
Supported formats .............................. 280
State TS audio/video packetizing ................. 173
Job states ............................................107 VS7000 10-RU (AC 200-240V single phase) ..
Statmux 266, ................. 269, 272, 275, 277, 278, 279
job creation ............................................45
Pool global bitrate ...............................177
Rate mode parameter ..........................165
Setting .................................................179 W
View .............................................110, 112
Status Web TV
Definition ...............................................87 HLS ........................................ 49, 181, 289
Equipment status .....................32, 39, 128 Smooth streaming .......... 52, 54, 190, 289
Jobs status ...................................106, 109 Workflow
Nodes status ....................................33, 89 Categories ........................................... 104
Pictograms .............................................40 Creation ................................................. 58
Status bar ......................................39, 128 Library ................................................. 130
System KVM (HP interface) .................219 List ......................................................... 91
Subtitles Publication ..................................... 60, 130
DVB subtitles .......................................154 Samples ................................................. 46
HLS specifications .......................289, 291 Tab description ...................................... 90
MPEG-2 TS specifications ....................290
Smooth streaming specifications 290, 292

T
Time
Configuration ...................................36, 80
Daylight saving time ........................36, 81
Display in the GUI ..........................39, 128
Job end ................................................106
Job start ...............................................106
Job submission ...................................106
Zone .........................................36, 81, 128
TS file
Input .....................................................137
Output ..................................................180
TS over IP
Input .....................................................136
Streamer output ..................................175

ViBE VS7000 v03.01 343


User Manual - Edition M

S-ar putea să vă placă și